JP7111122B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is conducted, the reels start rotating, and the reels stop during rotation. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a game progress means for progressing a game as one game, which is started based on a predetermined start operation by a player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
privilege granting means for awarding a privilege to a player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set,
As the advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the number of games tends to be larger than the first advantageous state are set,
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games or more can be executed as a unit state, and when the continuation condition for the unit state is satisfied, the unit state is executed and then the next unit state is entered. , if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
In the advantageous state, the special number of games is set as one unit notification state, and if the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied, the transition to the next unit notification state is performed, while the continuation condition is satisfied. If not, it has a notification control means that does not move to the next unit notification state,
The notification control means is characterized in that it is possible to execute the unit notification state across the unit states.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows a continuation determination process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a selection rate of AT mode continuation rate; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; 4 is a flowchart showing AT mode processing; It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of confrontation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of battle production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific effect table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the occurrence of a specific effect and the presence or absence of continuation of AT mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the continuation rate of AT mode and the occurrence timing of the specific effect. 10 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing in modification 2. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. 14 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in Modified Example 3. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing suggestion effect setting processing in Modification 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a suggestion effect|presentation table. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by the auxiliary display section in modification 5; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd specific production|presentation setting process. It is a flow chart which shows standby production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd specific production|presentation table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the production|presentation in AT mode in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd specific production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd specific production|presentation table. FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between AT mode sets and pseudo sets; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a third specific effect setting process in modification 1; It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd specific effect table at the time of an update. 13 is a flowchart showing a third specific effect setting process in modification 2; It is a figure which shows an example of an ending game number table. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a third specific effect table in modification 3; FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the AT mode continuation rate and the pseudo set; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the production|presentation in AT mode in 3rd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows the 4th specific production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot effect game number setting process. 7 is a flowchart showing adjustment processing; It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot effect game number table and an adjustment game number table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the production|presentation of AT mode last set.

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be rotated individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of, for example, 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse). controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started with three medals betted or the game may be started with two medals betted. When medals are bet and the game is started, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals bet, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal. The game is also called a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the first small winning combination described above can be achieved due to the difference in the lines on which the "bell" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for the role. When the third minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination can be easily understood from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor winning combination is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be easily understood from the difference in the line on which the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 6th minor winning combination are stopped on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Ark shell" symbol or "Seinen" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "White 7" symbol and "White shellfish" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 9th minor winning prize to the 32nd minor winning prize should all stop with the “Bell” symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor wins won, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege (game value) given according to the game result. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings that give a replay benefit (game value) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals include first to twelfth replay winnings. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols are stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. To establish. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(e), the "white 7" symbols are stopped together on the medium line L2.

In the third replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. To establish. When the symbol corresponding to the third replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(f), the "WHITE 7" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel. The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of 32R.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

The sixth replay consists of a “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol, a “white 7” symbol, a “BAR” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

In the seventh replay, the left reel 32L has a “bell” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol, and a right reel 32R has a “watermelon” symbol. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), so that the so-called "watermelon tenpai" is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The eighth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

In the ninth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that the so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The tenth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``young man'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stops on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the twelfth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbols corresponding to the 10th re-game win or 12th re-game win stop on the activated line ML, a "Cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the 10th re-game or 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the 10th re-game. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and the 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB wins. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. When the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the symbols "BAR" are aligned and stopped on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 14(b). , "Red 7" symbols, "Red 7" symbols, and "BAR" symbols stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5.

When the "red clam" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB wins. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. When the symbols corresponding to the 2nd BB winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(c), the symbols "WHITE 7" are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3, or as shown in FIG. 14(d). , ``white 7'' symbols, ``white 7'' symbols, and ``red 7'' symbols stop in order from the left on the lower line L3.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Stop lamps 42b to 44b are built in the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively. The light from the stop lamps 42b-44b is partially transmitted through the operating surfaces of the stop switches 42-44, and the light from the stop lamps 42b-44b becomes visible through the stop switches 42-44. When the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is enabled, the stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to turn on, and when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disabled, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled. are controlled to turn off.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual tokens as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to three and the specific number is set to three, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when virtual medals are inserted and the prescribed number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, When three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, the specified number is set to three or two, and the specific number is set to two, the first When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. A direction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The above-described CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the set value, the set value information storage area 106c for storing the set value, and the like.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display are connected to the output side. 65 is connected. Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Further, all or part of the components 42b to 44b and 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 are configured to be directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 controls these components 42b to 44b. , 63 to 65 may be directly controlled.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether or not the read result is normal. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, a timer update process for subtracting/adding the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay wins have been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process (step S107) of the timer interrupt process. When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211, and the medal payout process of step S212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags are set, the current game state is determined to be the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is selected. . When the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 21). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing of the RAM 106 . In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step S306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and a combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value Regardless, it is about 1/18.4 respectively, and the probability of winning the pushing order bell is about 1/1.53. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in the 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 2-bet game, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the win flag set in step S306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, if the watermelon is won (winning at IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination winning flag are set. Stop symbol information is set so that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB win flag is set, if the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB win is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even when the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, setting of the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning will be performed. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step S313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1BB prize, the 7th minor role prize, and the When the stop pattern information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established prior to the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, after executing the section display first process in step S314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation production process is for performing production using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309, the result of the lottery result correspondence process performed in step S310, etc. processing. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 outputs a progress (command) to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side causes each stop switch 42 . . . 44 are illuminated to notify the player or the like that the stop command can be generated.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel. The display control device 81 that has received the stop command command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect of stopping the corresponding reel, and also corresponds to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. Control is performed so that the stop lamps 42b to 44b are extinguished.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol, and if they are equal, reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won at the push order bell (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when operated in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established when the player wins. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the smallest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the active line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor winning symbol cannot be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. 2 minor winning prize, 3rd minor winning prize, 4th minor winning winning prize, 5th minor winning winning prize, or 6th minor winning winning prize are established, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, other minor wins will be established, or none of the minor wins will be established and will be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step S414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, a winning result handling process is executed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , to end the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step S414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on whether there is a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to a MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games, if the prescribed number of games is set to 2 or 3, the second credit insertion switch 57 can be operated. It is permissible to play a 2-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step S506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In the subsequent step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for allowing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to . Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the 1st BB prize has not been established means that the 2nd BB prize has been established. In this case, the process advances to step S511 to execute the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. In other words, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed as a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.31. Also, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although an increase in medals cannot be expected, it is possible to proceed with the game without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination where 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and even in the 2-bet game, winning is more likely to occur in the 2 BB state than in the normal game state. is set.

However, as described above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are eliminated, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state process, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any minor combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process by the lottery table for the BB state and each reel control. When winning is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, in step S516, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that it is not equal to or less than 0, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step S518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that receives the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

After that, in step S521, after setting the specified bet numbers to 2 and 3, the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so that the 2-bet game can be easily played. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are finished, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. In order to play a bet game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal insertion slot 45. - 特許庁

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a state called a non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, the winning of the second BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is carried over is entered. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in the 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. In addition, the first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. Also, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a winning combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another winning combination when the winning combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for medal increase. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins can be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the winning small combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase and decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won by pushing order. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 23) of winning the 1st to 6th small wins when the bell is won in the pressing order. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB is won. will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the 2nd BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) will be described as a game feature using notification (push order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process of ascertaining the number of bets for the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S602. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S603. As already explained, in the non-internal state before the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB and in the internal state after the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the specified number of bets. In the state, 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets. The processing of steps S602 and S603 is processing for determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) that is prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. , and if there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (the instruction function process) from step S604 onward.

That is, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, while the process for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. In the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified bet number, the two-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to play the internal state in the 3-bet game and carry over the second BB to the normal game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like may occur and a normal section in which the push order notification may not occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 29, as a trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S704, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step S701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting an advantageous zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the AT mode, and is set when it is possible to shift to the AT mode. The AT mode win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode shift lottery has been won, the shift to the AT mode has been confirmed, and the state has not yet shifted to the AT mode. is. If neither flag is set in step S606, AT lottery processing is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S606, continuation determination processing is executed in step S608, and AT addition processing is executed in step S609.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing the transition to the AT mode regardless of the suitability of the AT mode transition lottery (without winning) when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, as described above, the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. It is deducted in some games and not in e.g. 2bet games.

After executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in step S801, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has reached 0 in step S802. If it has not reached 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps S803 to S808.

That is, in step S803, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is easier to win than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to recognize that it is.

If the CZ mode flag is not set at step S804, then at step S805, a process of acquiring a normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set in step S804, then in step S806, a process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29, the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ have respective winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery set according to the lottery result of the game. If it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by eye A, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 1% for normal use, and if it is for CZ, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 3%. The AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. Further, the normal reply A, normal reply B and normal reply C are set so that the normal reply does not win the AT mode transition, while the CZ reply may win the AT mode transition.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S805 or step S806, AT mode transition lottery processing is performed in step S807 using the obtained transition lottery table and the lottery result of the game grasped in step S803. to run. Then, in step S808, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition win has been made.

If it is determined at step S808 that the AT mode transition is won, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 at step S802, the AT mode winning process of steps S809 to S812 is executed. Further, when it is determined in step S808 that the AT mode transition win has not been made, a process for AT mode non-win win is executed in steps S813 to S816.

In the process for winning the AT mode, in step S809, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the AT mode transition to the CZ mode has been won. In the case of winning during the CZ mode, processing for ending the CZ mode is performed in steps S810 and S811. That is, in step S810, processing for clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step S811, a process of clearing the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e to 0 is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the CZ mode. This is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time a is consumed.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S809, or after the process of step S811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed in step S812. Through such processing, the determination in step S606 is affirmative from the next game.

In the AT mode non-winning process, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step S814, a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and whether or not to shift to the CZ mode is determined by lottery using the lottery result of the game ascertained in step S803. . As shown in FIG. 29, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery differs according to the lottery result of the game. It is set so that the easier the game lottery result is, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. In other words, if the lottery results for a game in which the AT mode transition lottery is likely to be won, but the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the game is set to easily shift to the CZ mode.

After the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed in step S814, it is determined in step S815 whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery was won, and if not, the AT lottery process is ended as it is. In the case of CZ mode transition winning, in step S816, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed.

After one of the winning flags is set in step S812 or step S816, a sign mode setting process is performed in steps S817 to S820. The portent mode is a mode in which a portent effect is performed to indicate that the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. After passing through the omen mode, the notification of the transition lottery that has been won is performed.

In step S817, a lottery process for the precursor game is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursory games, the number of precursory games is drawn by lottery according to the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning, and the like. For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if you win the CZ mode transition lottery, or if you win the transition lottery with Cherry A. In this case, a longer predictive game number is more likely to be selected than in the case of winning the transfer lottery in Cherry C.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 in step S817. As described above, if you win the AT mode transition lottery during CZ mode, the CZ mode will end regardless of the number of remaining games in CZ mode. can be comprehended by the player. Therefore, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the sign mode is set to 0 games, so that the AT mode transition lottery is won even though the player knows that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. It is possible to reduce discomfort due to the suggestive notification of what has been done in the precursor mode.

In subsequent step S818, a process of inputting the result of the lottery in step S817 to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining portent games, and is decremented by one each time a game is completed during the portent mode.

Then, in step S819, a process of setting the portent flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step S820, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the main AT lottery is executed. end the processing. The omen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the omen mode is on, and the omen command indicates that the omen mode has been set, the number of games in the omen mode, and which transition lottery has been won. This is a command for making the control device 81 grasp. The display control device 81, which has received the portent command, grasps the number of games in the portent mode and the type of transition lottery that has been won, and performs processing for executing an effect during the portent mode on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. conduct.

<Continuation determination process>
Next, the continuation determination process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the continuation determination process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set.

Here, in the AT mode of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 18) of games are set as one set (number of unit continuations, unit state), and for example, when updating one set of AT mode (set is When starting or ending a set), a continuation lottery for the next set will be held, and if you win the continuation lottery, after the end of the set, you will move to the next set and will not win the continuation lottery. , the AT mode ends without moving to the next set. Then, the continuation determination process in step S608 is a process for performing the continuation lottery when updating the set.

In step S901, it is determined whether the AT game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 18 or not. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in one set, and is a counter to which 18 is input when updating the set. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is one set of AT mode start games. If the current game is not the start game, the continuation determination process is terminated. If it is the starting game, the process proceeds to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the AT set counter provided in the various counter area 106e is zero. The AT set counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of sets that can be continued to the next set without performing the continuation lottery even if the continuation lottery is not won, and the continuation condition is This is a counter which is incremented by 1 when the player wins an additional lottery in the established situation and is subtracted by 1 when the continuation lottery is not won or the next set is continued without performing the continuation lottery. If the AT set counter is 0, in step S903, the winning probability of the continuation lottery selected in the current AT mode is grasped.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of continuation rates are set as the probability of winning the continuation lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "continuation rate"). Specifically, as shown in FIG. A high rate of 90% and lower continuation rates of 60% and 10% are set. The continuation rate is set when shifting to the AT mode (continuation rate setting processing in step S1211 described later). In step S903, the information set in the continuation rate setting process is read to grasp the current continuation rate of the AT mode.

After grasping the continuation rate in step S903, a continuation lottery process is executed in step S904. That is, if a continuation rate of 90% is selected, the winning will continue with a probability of 90% in the process of step S904, and if a continuation rate of 10% is selected, 10% will be won in the process of step S904. Percentage chance of winning continuously.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the result of the process in step S904 is continuous winning.If continuous winning is determined, in step S906, a process of setting a continuous flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The continuation flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the continuation condition of the current set (condition for shifting to the next set) is satisfied. Then, in step S907, after executing the process of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the continuation determination process ends.

Also, if it is determined in step S902 that the AT set counter is not 0, then in step S908 the process of subtracting 1 from the AT set counter is executed, and then in step S906 the continuation flag is set and the continuation command is issued. After setting, the continuation determination process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT set counter is not 0, the continuation condition of the set is satisfied without passing through the continuation lottery. It should be noted that the continuation lottery may be executed regardless of the value of the AT set counter, and the continuation condition may be met if the AT set counter is 1 or more in the case of continuation non-winning.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of one set in the AT mode (when the start lever 41 is operated), whether or not the continuation condition for whether the AT mode continues to the next set of the set to be started this time is satisfied or not. A determination is made, and when it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, a continuation flag is set, and the information is output to the display control device 81 . In this case, the display control device 81 performs a process for performing an effect assuming that the continuation condition is satisfied as the effect of the current set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S905 that it is not the continuation winning, the continuation determination processing is terminated as it is. In this case, the continuation condition is not satisfied at the start of one set in the AT mode, and no continuation command is output at the start of the set. The display control device 81 grasps that the continuation condition is not established by not receiving the continuation command at the start of the set, and performs the production on the premise that the continuation condition is not established as the production of the current set. Take action to ensure that

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the AT add-on process, separate from the above continuation lottery, an add-on lottery to add the number of sets in AT mode is performed. Try to continue until the next set.

First, in step S1001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S1002, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29, the additional lottery table has an additional winning rate set according to the lottery result of the game. While normal roles such as bells do not win additional prizes, specific roles such as Chance A to Chance C, Cherry A to Cherry C, Common Bell, and Watermelon, which are difficult to win in the lottery process of each game, are set to allow additional wins. It is In the lottery process of each game, among the specific roles, for example, chance C is more likely to be won than chance A, and cherry C is more likely to be won than cherry A. It is set such that the harder the lottery results are, the easier it is to win the additional lottery. It should be noted that, if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, the additional lottery may not be won, and if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, the additional lottery may not be performed. In addition, it is possible to have a configuration in which an additional win can be won even when the lottery result of each game is a normal role, and the probability of an extra win in the normal role is lower than the probability of an extra win in the case of a specific role. .

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step S1002, an additional lottery is executed in step S1003, and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won in step S1004. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, it is determined in step S1005 whether or not the continuation flag is set.

If the continuation flag is not set in step S1005, processing for setting the continuation flag is executed in step S1006. Then, in step S1007, after executing a process of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT addition process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the continuation command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

On the other hand, if the continuation flag is set in step S1005, a process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed in step S1008. By adding 1 to the AT set counter in step S1008, it is determined that the AT mode will continue at least until the set following the current set. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that 1 is uniformly added to the AT set counter when winning the additional lottery, but it may be configured to add a number of 2 or more. The number to be added to the AT set counter may be determined by lottery according to the lottery result of the game in which the number is 0.

In the following step S1009, the processing for setting the set addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this processing for addition is finished. The set add-on command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp the fact that the add-on lottery has been won and the value of the AT set counter. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of sets may be added for one additional win, it is preferable to set information on the number of sets to be added to the set addition command. The display control device 81 that has received the set addition command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the addition of the set by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 27), after the process of step S607 or step S609 is executed, the process of notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42-44 is executed in steps S610-S613.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the pressing order notification processing executed in steps S610 to S613, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. will be explained. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be called, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 33(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and arrangement as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for the pushing hand. For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to obtain a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. In addition, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is met when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition that the transition to the advantageous section can occur and the pushing order informing can occur is established. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner by being easily notified of the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is: In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefits of the push order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display displays the payout number on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop button in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the order of pressing in steps S610 to S613 will be described.

That is, in step S610, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is the winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the pressing order bell is not won, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is. If the bell is won in the pressing order, it is determined in step S611 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, in step S612, the command monitor 68 is turned on so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes will be carried out according to the type of the pressing order bell this time. Control. Then, in step S613, after executing the process of setting the push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes as an output target to the display control device 81. , terminates the actual pressing order notification process. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed. If the AT mode flag is not set in step S611, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S1102. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S1103. That is, the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 is processing corresponding to the processing of steps S601 to S603, and determines whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state. processing. If it is not the specific prescribed number, the processing for the winning result is terminated without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step S1104.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102 or step S1103 and the number of bets is the specific prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. The case where the precursor flag is set means that after winning the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery, the winning of these transition lotteries has not yet been notified. In this case, in step S1105, the precursor mode process is executed, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the precursor flag is not set in step S1104, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set in step S1106. If the CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode is in progress, the CZ mode process is executed in step S1107, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

If the CZ mode flag has not been set in step S1106, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the AT mode flag has been set. If the AT mode flag is set and the AT mode is in progress, the AT mode process is executed in step S1109, and then the winning result handling process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1108, the winning result handling process is terminated.

The precursor mode process, the CZ mode process, and the AT mode process will be described below.

<Processing for precursor mode>
In the portent mode processing, as shown in FIG. 36, processing for subtracting 1 from the portent counter is executed in step S1201. Then, in step S1202, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has reached 0. If not, the precursor mode processing is terminated. If the precursor counter is 0, the process of clearing the precursor flag is executed in step S1203.

In the subsequent step S1204, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set, thereby grasping whether or not the current portent mode has been shifted based on the winning of the AT mode shift lottery. If the AT mode winning flag is not set and the current portent mode is based on winning the CZ mode shift lottery, the process proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, processing for clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step S1206, a CZ mode flag is set, and in step S1207, a process of inputting 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. After that, in step S1208, after executing the process of setting the CZ start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this portent mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ start command controls so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 inform that the CZ mode is started as well as the fact that the CZ mode shift lottery is won.

If the AT mode winning flag is set in step S1204 and the current portent mode is the porting mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, then in step S1209 the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is performed. Run. Then, in step S1210, a process of setting an AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. In subsequent step S1211, a continuation rate setting process is executed. As described above, the AT mode in the present embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a set of a predetermined number of games is set, and in a situation where there are no remaining sets (a situation in which the AT set counter is 0), a set is played. The AT mode is configured to continue until the continuous lottery is not won, and the continuation rate setting process in step S1211 is a process of setting the winning probability (continuation rate) of the continuous lottery.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 37, the selection rate of the plurality of continuation rates (90%, 60%, 10%) is set differently according to the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. , and in step S1211, it is determined by lottery which continuation rate is to be selected based on the set value. Specifically, basically, the higher the set value (the higher the set value for the payout rate), the higher the continuation rate is set to be more likely to be selected. is selected with a probability of 30% at setting 6, it is selected with a probability of 70% at setting 6. However, the continuation rate of 90% is more likely to be selected with the odd number setting than with the even number setting, and the setting value of 5 is the most likely to be selected. When the continuation rate of 90% is selected, the 90% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and when the continuation rate of 60% is selected, the 60% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. However, if the continuation rate of 10% is selected, a 10% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) indicating each of these continuation rates is a flag that is cleared when the AT mode to be shifted this time ends. That is, once the continuation rate of the AT mode is set, the continuation lottery for each set is performed at that continuation rate until the AT mode ends.

After executing the continuation rate setting process in step S1211, the process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed in step S1212. As described above, the AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games until one set of AT mode is completed, and is decremented by one each time one game is completed. Then, if the continuation condition is satisfied when the AT game counter becomes 0, the predetermined number of 18 is input to the AT game counter again, and when the AT game counter becomes 0, the continuation condition is satisfied. If not, the AT mode will end.

Thereafter, in step S1212, a process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and the precursor mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform an effect corresponding to the start of the AT mode.

<CZ mode processing>
In the CZ mode processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, processing for subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step S1301. In subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1301. If the CZ game counter is not 0, the CZ mode processing is terminated.

If the CZ game counter is 0, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S1303. After that, in step S1304, a process of setting a CZ end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this CZ mode process is ended. Upon receiving the CZ end command, the display control device 81 controls so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are notified that the CZ mode has ended. As already explained, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at that point and shifts to the portent mode. Therefore, when the CZ mode is terminated by clearing the CZ mode flag in step S1303, it means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the CZ mode.

<AT mode processing>
In the AT mode process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT game counter is executed in step S1401. In subsequent step S1402, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step S1401. If the AT game counter is not 0, the AT mode processing is terminated.

If the AT game counter is 0, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set and the continuation condition is satisfied, the processing for shifting to the next set (steps S1404 to S1406) is executed. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step S1403, processing for ending the AT mode (steps S1407 to S1410) is executed.

If the continuation condition is satisfied in step S1403, processing for clearing the continuation flag is executed in step S1404. Then, in step S1404, a process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed, and in step S1406, a process of setting a set update command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this AT mode process is executed. exit. The display control device 81 that has received the set update command executes processing for updating the effects of the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 in response to the shift to the set of the AT mode.

On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied in step S1403, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1407, and the continuation rate information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is cleared in step S1408. Execute the process. Then, in step S1409, a process of setting an AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. After that, in step S1410, a process of setting an AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this AT mode process is ended. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous section when the AT mode ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode end command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform an effect corresponding to the end of the AT mode.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where, among the advantageous sections, the case is a specific section in which at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S1501 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1502.

In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1503. Then, in step S1504, processing for setting an advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1505, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous section. Then, in step S1506, processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed. The advantageous section transition processing is processing for setting the state and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section to be transitioned to this time. Specifically, in the advantageous section transition process, the ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and the number of ceiling games that allows the transition to the AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery after the advantageous section transition is set. I do. The lottery for the ceiling counter may be performed, for example, by using the set value or the lottery result of the game. The higher the setting, the more likely the number of ceiling games to be selected. It is preferable to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games, or to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games as the result of the lottery result of the current game is less likely to win. Then, a value corresponding to the number of ceiling games determined by lottery may be input to the ceiling counter. For example, by outputting a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter to the display control device 81, the number of ceiling games is suggested. A production may be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

In the first section display processing, after the advantageous section transition processing is executed in step S1506, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step S1507.

If it is determined in step S1501 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1508 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1508, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, after the display start processing is executed in step S1507 or after the display continuation processing is executed in step S1508, AT mode is executed in step S1509. Determine whether the flag is set. If it is determined in step S1509 that none of the AT mode flags have been set, then in step S1510 a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1509 that one of the AT mode flags is set, in step S1511, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Run. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1510 or step S1511, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1512. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1513, a process for displaying the calculation result of step S1512 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. there is

In step S1513, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1512 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1513, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after performing the processing of rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1512. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration in which "0" is always displayed by is also possible. A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S416 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second processing is terminated. When the advantageous section flag is set, in step S1602, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. In the subsequent step S1603, update processing of the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process in step S1603, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing MY update processing in step S1603, in step S1604, remaining game number management processing is executed, and in subsequent step S1605, remaining number management processing is executed. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the total number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. grasp whether or not In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is the increase/decrease number in the advantageous zone. Know if there are more situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

After executing the number-of-remaining-games management process and the number-of-remaining-numbers management process, in step S1606, it is determined whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY is increased to the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the number is 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1607. In the subsequent step S1608, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S1609, after executing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing ends.

Specifically, regarding the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step S1609, the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section are initialized. Execute the process to return to For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the AT preparation counter, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in this advantageous section information initialization process, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification. This is a process of clearing the RAM for variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step S1606 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process advances to step S1610, and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine whether or not If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step S1607 to execute advantageous section end processing. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the advantageous section end processing is executed as it is.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1702. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 has been executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, at step S1704, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or if the process of step S1704 has been executed, then in step S1705 it is determined whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main control unit 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the command corresponding to the lottery result There are an omen command, a continuation command, a set additional command, a push order notification command, etc., which are set in the processing (FIG. 27). In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or if the processing of step S1706 has been executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of a stop instruction command as the command for each stop operation, in step S1708, each stop operation time effect setting process for setting an effect based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or if the process of step S1708 has been executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S419 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to commands, 1BB start command, 2BB start command, 1BB end command, 2BB end command, CZ start command, which are set in bonus state processing (Fig. 24), winning result corresponding processing (Fig. 35), etc. There are an AT start command, a CZ end command, a set update command, an AT end command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

When a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S1711, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step S1711, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) are set, and without going through the main controller 101 Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to, set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1706 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is push order win (push order bell win). If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, in step S1803, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. Run the settings.

If it is determined in step S1801 that the lottery result of the current game is not winning a second hand, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the lottery result of this game is winning a specific role. As already explained, the specific combination is a lottery result called a rare combination that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game. A to Cherry C and Watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 29, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than other lottery results. In addition, in the AT mode extra lottery, when the special role is won, the extra lottery can be won, but when the normal role such as the normal reply A is won, the extra lottery cannot be won. When the lottery result of the game this time is that the specific combination is won, a process of setting the specific combination notification effect is executed in step S1805. In the setting processing of the special role notification effect, setting is executed so that the specific role information that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above special roles is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. . As the special combination notification, for example, an effect is set such that three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided.

If a negative determination is made in step S1802 or step S1804, or if the processing in step S1803 or step S1805 is executed, the process advances to step S1806. In step S1806, it is determined whether or not a precursor command has been received as the current start command. If an omen command has been received and the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is won and the omen mode is set, the sub-side omen counter provided in the various counter areas 183b in step S1807 indicates the number of omen games. Execute the process to enter the corresponding value. The sub-side omen counter corresponds to the omen counter in the main controller 101, and is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the omen mode. mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1806 or after the processing of step S1807 is executed, it is determined in step S1808 whether or not the sub-side precursor counter is greater than zero. If the sub-side predictor counter is greater than 0 and the predictor mode is on, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side predictor counter is executed in step S1809. Then, in step S1810, a process of setting an effect for the precursor mode according to the value of the sub-side precursor counter is executed. For example, the smaller the value of the sub-side omen counter, the more strongly suggesting that one of the transition lotteries has been won may be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1808, or after the processing of step S1810 is executed, AT effect setting processing is executed in step S1811, and other start time effect setting processing is executed in step S1812, and this Terminate the effect setting process at the start. In step S1812, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is executed. do. The AT effect setting process will be described later in detail.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop of step S1710 in the effect setting process (FIG. 42) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the 1st BB start command, the 2nd BB start command, the 1st BB end command, the 2nd BB end command, the CZ start command, and the AT start command. This is a process for setting effects in the case of all-stop commands such as commands, CZ end commands, set update commands, AT end commands, and the like.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. If the CZ start command has been received, in step S1902 the sub-side CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and in step S1903 the CZ start effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the effect setting process for the purpose. For example, as shown in FIG. 45(a), the CZ start effect displays that the CZ mode is started and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode (10) on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not a CZ end command has been received. If the CZ end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side CZ flag is executed in step S1905, and the effect setting for performing the CZ end effect in the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step S1906 Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 45(b), for example, the CZ end effect is set such that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0 and the end of the CZ mode is notified. It should be noted that the CPU 181 sets the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect for the CZ mode in each game in which the sub-side CZ flag is set. The effects for the CZ mode are different from those in the normal mode, for example, in the background color, appearing characters, etc., so that the player can recognize that the CZ mode is in progress. Further, when performing the effect for the CZ mode, the CPU 181 controls the display of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode to update (decrease) the display according to the progress of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not an AT start command has been received. If the AT start command has been received, in step S1908, the sub-side AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. A process of inputting 18 is executed. The sub-side AT counter corresponds to the AT game counter on the main control device 101 side. After executing the process of step S1909, the process of adding 1 to the sub-side set counter provided in the various counter area 183b is executed in step S1910. The sub-side set counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of AT mode sets.

In the subsequent step S1911, an effect setting process for performing an AT start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For the AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 46(a), an effect is set in which a display (character display such as "AT start") to the effect that the AT mode is started is performed. In the AT start effect, for example, the background or sound effect may be set differently according to the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started so as to suggest the continuation rate.

If a negative determination is made in step S1907, it is determined in step S1912 whether or not an AT end command has been received. If the AT end command is received, in step S1913 the process of clearing the sub-side AT flag is executed, and in step S1914 the effect setting process for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed. Run. For example, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the AT end effect displays the end of the AT mode (character display such as "See you later"), and notifies the number of consecutive sets in the current AT mode and the number of medals won. is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1912, it is determined in step S1915 whether or not a set update command has been received. When a set update command has been received, one set in AT mode is completed, and the next set is to be performed, processing for clearing the sub-side continuation flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S1916. do. The sub-side continuation flag corresponds to the continuation flag on the main controller 101 side. In the following step S1917, it is checked whether or not an occurrence completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and if it is set, a process of clearing the occurrence completion flag is executed. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that a predetermined specific effect has occurred in the set to end this time. The specific effect will be described in detail later, but in step S1917, when updating the set, a process of erasing information indicating that the specific effect has occurred in the set before updating is performed.

After executing the process of step S1917, the process of inputting 18 to the sub-side AT counter is executed in step S1918, and the process of adding 1 to the sub-side set counter is executed in step S1919.

After executing the processing of step S1903, step S1906, step S1911, step S1914 or step S1919, or after making a negative determination in step S1915, after executing other all stop effect setting processing in step S1920, This all-stop time effect setting process is terminated. In step S1920, processing is performed to perform effects corresponding to various commands output at the start and end of the BB, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, and the winning combination is executed. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts, or the speaker 64 is controlled to emit sound effects corresponding to automatic bets during replay.

<AT effect setting processing>
Next, the AT effect setting process executed in step S1811 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 43) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The AT effect setting process is a process for performing an effect during the AT mode. Therefore, prior to the description of the AT effect setting process, the outline of the effect during the AT mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53. FIG.

<Overview of AT production>
As already explained, the AT mode in this embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a set of 18 games is set as a predetermined number, and if the continuation condition is satisfied when one set of games is completed, While moving to the next set, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the AT mode ends in the set. In this embodiment, as a production in one set, an allied character and an enemy character face each other, and if the continuation condition is satisfied, the allied character wins, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the allied character is defeated. and the enemy character wins. In this embodiment, the first 10 games and the last 8 games of one set of games have different productions, and the above-mentioned battle production in which friendly characters and enemy characters confront each other is shown in the latter 8 games. In the latter part, which is the first half of the 10 games, a confrontation effect is set in which the ally character performing the battle effect confronts the enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the first game, a VS display effect (FIG. 52(a1)) is set as the confrontation effect in the first half, in which a friendly character and an enemy character facing each other are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. It is In the 2nd to 4th games of the confrontation production, the ally character up production (FIG. 52(b1)) is set in which the auxiliary display section 65 displays the ally character in a state of being enthusiastic with an aura behind them. It is In the 5th to 7th games of the confrontation effect, an enemy character up effect (FIG. 52(c1)) is set in which the enemy character illuminated by the moonlit night is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In the 8th to 10th games of the confrontation effect, a staring effect (FIG. 52(d1)) is set in which the auxiliary display section 65 displays the ally character and the enemy character glaring at each other while scattering sparks. ing.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the 11th to 16th games, the battle effects in the second half are a friendly attack effect (FIG. 53(a)) in which a friendly character attacks, and an enemy attack effect in which an enemy character attacks. One of the attack effects (FIG. 53(b)) is repeated three times in total, and a two-way attack effect in which both players attack each other is performed in the 17th game. Then, when the continuation condition is satisfied, a teammate victory effect (FIG. 53(c)) is performed in which the teammate character wins in the 18th game, which is the final game of the set, and the next set is started. If the continuation condition is not met, an ally defeat effect (FIG. 53(d)) is performed in which the ally character is defeated in the 18th game, and the AT mode ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, a set of effects is set such that the battle effect is performed after the confrontation effect, and the success or failure of the continuation condition is notified in the battle effect. and results are favorably enhanced.

As already explained, in the set management type AT mode of the present embodiment, a continuation lottery is performed at the start of one set to determine whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied. In the middle of , if you win the extra lottery based on the winning of a specific role, the continuation condition is established and it is configured to move to the next set.

Here, by adopting a configuration in which the continuation condition can be established based on the winning of a specific role as described above, although the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game is preferably increased, the probability of winning the specific role and the set game Depending on the number, it becomes difficult for the event that the continuation condition is established by winning the extra lottery as described above to occur, and the player may not have expectations for such an event. In that case, even if an attempt is made to increase the degree of attention to the lottery result of the game by using the additional lottery, there is a possibility that the effect cannot be expected.

In particular, when trying to optimize the game playability and game progress of the AT mode by increasing the number of medals to be added (net increase) per game in the AT mode, the number of games per set in the AT mode should be small. As described above, it becomes difficult for the continuation condition to be satisfied with the special role as a trigger. Moreover, since the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, you can expect to increase the number of games in normal mode and CZ mode other than AT mode, and increase the number of medals by the upper limit increase number (2400) in AT mode. By doing so, the number of games in the AT mode is naturally reduced and the above-mentioned net increase in the number of games is likely to be increased.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the continuation lottery for the set is won, the lottery result of the game is determined in the game before the announcement of the continuation lottery winning (the above-mentioned teammate victory effect). Even if it is not a specific role, it is configured to notify as if you have won the extra lottery.

Further, by adopting a configuration in which the result of the continuation lottery is notified based on the lottery result of each game as described above, the success or failure of the continuation condition is not determined by the continuation lottery at the time of renewal of each set, It is possible to give the impression that success or failure of the continuation condition of each set is determined based on the lottery result of each game.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for effecting each set during the AT mode as described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the AT effect setting process, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed in step S2001. Then, in step S2002, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received as the current start command. As already explained, the continuation command is output at the start of one set (at the start of the first game of the set) if the continuation lottery has been won (Fig. 31), and if the continuation lottery has not been won. This is a command that is output when the additional lottery is won in the set that is set (Fig. 32).

If a continuation command has been received in step S2002, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S2003. Through such processing, the CPU 181 can grasp that the continuation condition of the current set is satisfied.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002, or if the process of step S2003 has been executed, the process advances to step S2004. In step S2004, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is greater than 7, thereby determining whether or not it is the 1st to 10th games of the set. If it is the 1st game to the 10th game of the set, the process for performing the confrontation effect which is the first half part is executed in steps S2005 to S2008, and if it is the 11th game to the 18th game, In steps S2009 to S2013, a process for performing a battle effect, which is the second half part, is executed.

As the process for performing the confrontation effect, the process of acquiring the confrontation effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed in step S2005. As shown in FIG. 49, the confrontation effect table contains detailed effect contents of the confrontation effect to be executed in each game (VS display effect, ally character up effect, enemy character up effect) according to the value of the sub-side AT counter. production, staring production) are memorized.

Here, as the confrontation performance, normal performance and specific performance are set, and when the continuation condition of the current set is established, the confrontation performance as the specific performance can occur. The specific effect is set as an effect in which a part of the effect content in the auxiliary display section 65 is different from the normal effect.

For example, in the VS display effect, the character "VS" displayed between the friendly character and the enemy character is displayed in white characters in the normal effect, whereas the character "VS" is displayed in the specific effect. Text is set to be displayed in red. In the ally character-up effect, the aura worn by the ally character is white in the normal effect, but is set to be displayed in rainbow color in the specific effect. In the enemy character-up effect, a crescent moon is displayed in the normal effect, while a full moon is displayed in the specific effect. In the face-to-face production, a girl character cheering for an ally character is displayed in the specific production, while the girl character does not appear in the normal production.

After acquiring the confrontation effect table in step S2005, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set in step S2006, and if it is set, specific effect setting processing is executed in step S2007. do. The specific effect setting process is a process for setting whether or not to execute the specific effect in the confrontation effect in which the normal effect and the specific effect are set as described above.

<Specific effect setting process>
In the specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, it is determined in step S2101 whether or not the generated flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the specific effect has already been generated in this set, and is a flag that is set when the specific effect is generated. If the generated flag is set, the specific effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is set to occur only once in one set.

If the occurrence completion flag is not set, in step S2102, a process of ascertaining the lottery result of the current game is executed, and in step S2103, a process of ascertaining the current AT mode continuation rate is executed. Then, in step S2104, the process of acquiring the specific effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S2105, the specific effect lottery process is executed.

In the specific effect table, as shown in FIG. 51, the occurrence rate of the specific effect is set according to the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the specific effect occurs with a probability of 3.1% in the game that is the chance A, whereas the specific effect is generated with the probability of 20.0% in the game that is the chance B. An effect is generated, and it is set so that the specific effect is more likely to occur as the result of the lottery result of the game is less likely to be won. Moreover, in the present embodiment, not only specific roles as so-called rare roles such as Chance A and Chance B, but also normal roles such as Normal Rep A, Normal Rep B, Normal Rep C, Push Order Bell, etc. It is set so that a specific effect can occur even if In addition, it is set so that the specific effect can occur even if the result is a losing result in which none of the results are won.

In this case, for example, as a lottery result of each game, the winning order bell is won with a probability of about 65%. Since the effect is generated, the probability of the specific effect being generated triggered by the pressing order bell in each game is about 2.5%. On the other hand, for example, Cherry C, which always causes a specific effect when it appears, has a probability of about 0.008% as a lottery result of each game. is also about 0.008%, which is lower than the occurrence rate triggered by the pushing order bell.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the probability that the specific effect will occur triggered by the normal role including the normal role A to the normal role C, the pushing order bell and the result of being out of order is higher than the probability of the chance A to the chance C and the cherry A. ∼ It is set to be higher than the probability of occurrence of specific effects triggered by specific roles such as Cherry C, Common Bell and Watermelon. In the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the specific effect occurs with a probability of about 5.5% (about 1/18.2) triggered by the normal role, whereas the specific effect is triggered by the specific role. In AT mode with a probability of 0.8% (about 1/122) that a specific effect occurs, and the continuation rate is 90%, about 13.3% (about 1/7.52) with the normal role as a trigger While the specific effect occurs with probability, the specific effect occurs with a probability of approximately 1.0% (approximately 1/105) triggered by the specific role.

In other words, the probability of winning the specific effect lottery triggered by the specific role is set to be higher than the probability of winning the specific effect lottery triggered by the normal role, but the normal role is about 96.0% in each game. There is a probability of 4% (approximately 1/1.04) of appearing (winning), and the special role has a probability of approximately 3.56% (approximately 1/28.1) of appearing (winning) in each game. ), the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a normal role is higher than the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a specific role, and the lottery result of the game is a normal role. Even if there is, it is set so that the occurrence of a specific effect can be expected.

In relation to the number of continuous games (10) in which the specific effect can occur, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the denominator (about 18.2) of the probability of occurrence of the specific effect triggered by the normal role is Although it is larger than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, the denominator (about 7.52) of the occurrence probability of the specific role triggered by the normal role is smaller than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect. is set to be On the other hand, in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the denominator of the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a specific role (about 122) is greater than the number of continuous games of confrontation effects, and in AT mode with a continuation rate of 90% Also, the denominator (approximately 105) of the occurrence probability of the specific effect triggered by the specific role is set to be larger than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect. Therefore, in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, if the continuation rate is 90% AT mode (even if it is 60%, if it is not 10%), the specific effect triggered by the normal role, The probability is such that it can occur at least once on average, and on the other hand, the specific effect triggered by the specific role is higher if it does not occur even once regardless of the continuation rate of the AT mode.

By doing so, it is possible to expect an additional winning even if it is a normal role, while hoping for an additional winning triggered by a specific role, and even in the AT mode with a small number of games, in each game It is possible to realize the playability expected from the additional winning.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the occurrence probability of the specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode. Basically, even if the lottery result of the game is the same, the higher the continuation rate, the more likely the specific effect will occur. is set to be For example, a specific effect triggered by the push order bell occurs with a probability of about 3.8% in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, but with a probability of about 12.5% in AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%. It is set to occur with a probability, and the specific effect triggered by the failure result occurs with a probability of about 13.8% in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, whereas the continuation rate is 90%. AT mode is set to occur with a probability of about 23.5%. Therefore, the occurrence rate of the specific effect per game is about 6.3% if the continuation rate is 10%, and about 14.2% if the continuation rate is 90%, which is a high continuation rate. In the AT mode, it is easier for the specific effect to occur earlier. Then, in the confrontational effects between 10 games, the probability of occurrence of the specific effects is about 48.0% in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 10%, and about 78.5 in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 90%. %, and it is possible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode through the occurrence probability of a specific effect.

After executing the specific effect lottery process in step S2105, it is determined whether or not the lottery process wins in step S2106, and when it is determined that the lottery process has not been won, the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is. . In this case, the normal effect is executed in the current confrontation effect (step S2008 described later). If it is determined in step S2106 that the specific effect lottery has been won, then in step S2107 the process of grasping the specific effect corresponding to the value of the sub-side AT counter is executed. Specifically, for example, if the sub-side AT counter is 1, as the current specific effect, the character display of "VS" is displayed in red characters, and the sub-side AT counter is 2 to 4. If there is, the specific effect of displaying the color of the aura of the ally character in rainbow colors is grasped as the specific effect of this time. Then, in step S2108, after executing the process of setting the generated flag, the specific effect setting process is terminated.

In the AT effect setting process, if a negative determination is made in step S2006, or after the specific effect setting process is executed in step S2007, the confrontation performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in this game in step S2008 After executing the process for setting the effect, the AT effect setting process is terminated. In this case, if the specific effect is grasped in the above step S2107, it is set so that the confrontation effect in which the specific effect occurs is performed, and if the process of step S2107 is not performed (step S2006 or step If negative determination is made in S2106), setting is made so that a confrontation effect in which a normal effect occurs is performed.

By doing so, in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied and the continuation flag is set on the main control device 101 side, a specific effect occurs in the confrontation effect in the first half part of each set in the AT mode. You will get Then, the ratio of occurrence of the specific effect triggered by the normal role is higher than the ratio triggered by the specific role, and further, the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the earlier the specific effect is likely to occur. Therefore, the player proceeds with the game while hoping that the specific effect will occur in the first half of the set, and it is possible to significantly improve the playability of the first half.

In the AT effect setting process, the sub-side AT counter is 7 or less in step S2004, and when it is the second half part, the process for performing the battle effect is executed. That is, in step S2009, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 7, it is the 11th game of one set, and it is the 1st game of the battle effect. If the sub-side AT counter is 7, it is determined in step S2010 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set. A performance table is acquired, and a process of selecting a battle performance to be performed in this set from the acquired performance table by lottery or the like is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50, the continuation battle effect table notifies that the ally victory effect occurs in the final game of the set and the continuation condition is satisfied. A plurality of effect tables (PA1 to PA8) with different combinations of ally attack effects and enemy attack effects are set in the 16th game. Which effect table is selected depends on the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, for the effect table (PA1) in which the friendly attack effect occurs three times in a row, the 10% continuous AT mode is the most. It is set so that it is easy to select and the 90% continuous AT mode is the least likely to be selected. It is set so that the continuous AT mode is most likely to be selected and the 10% continuous AT mode is least likely to be selected. For example, the effect table (PA7) performed in the order of ally attack effect→enemy attack effect→enemy attack effect can be selected in the 10% continuous AT mode and the 90% continuous AT mode, while the 60% continuous AT mode can be selected. The effect table (PA8), which is not selected in the AT mode and causes the enemy attack effect to occur three times in a row, is not selected in the AT mode with 10% continuation and the AT mode with 60% continuation, but is selected in the AT mode with 90% continuation. It is possible to predict or grasp the continuation rate of the AT mode by the selected effect table (combination and order of each attack effect). In step S2011, one effect table is selected from the continuation battle effect tables, and the address information of the selected effect table is stored in the address information storage area 183c.

When it is determined in step S2010 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, in step S2012, a non-continuing battle effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and the current set is performed from the acquired effect table. A process of selecting a battle presentation by lottery or the like is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50, the non-continuing battle effect table notifies that the ally defeat effect has occurred in the final game of the set and the continuation condition has not been met. A plurality of effect tables (PB1 to PB8) with different combinations of ally attack effects and enemy attack effects are set for the 1st to 16th games. Which production table is selected depends on the continuation rate of the AT mode. The % continuation AT mode is set to be easier to select than the 10% continuation AT mode, and the production table (PB4 ) is set so that the 10% continuous AT mode is more likely to be selected than the 60% continuous AT mode and the 90% continuous AT mode. For example, the effect table (PB6) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → ally attack effect can be selected in the AT mode of 90% continuation, while the AT mode of 10% continuation and the AT mode of 60% continuation can be selected. The effect table (PB7), which is not selected in the AT mode and is performed in the order of enemy attack effect → ally attack effect → ally attack effect, can be selected in the 60% continuous AT mode, while the 10% continuous AT mode and the 90% continuous AT mode can be selected. The effect table (PB8), which is not selected in the AT mode with continuation of %, and the production of friendly attacks occurs three times in a row, can be selected in the AT mode with 10% continuation, while the AT mode with 60% continuation and the AT mode with 90% continuation can be selected. It is possible to predict or grasp the continuation rate of AT mode by the effect table (combination and order of each attack effect) to be selected, such as not being selected in AT mode. In step S2012, one effect table is selected from the discontinuation battle effect tables, and the address information of the selected effect table is stored in the address information storage area 183c.

Comparing the continuous battle effect table and the non-continuous battle effect table, for example, in the effect tables (PA3, PB6) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → ally attack effect, the battle effect is performed with the ally victory effect. When it ends, it is suggested that it is a 90% continuous AT mode, while when the battle production ends with an ally defeat production, it is confirmed that it was a 90% continuous AT mode, and an ally attack In the production table (PA1, PB8) where the production occurs three times in a row, when the battle production occurs with the ally victory production, the AT mode of 10% continuation is suggested, while when the battle production ends with the ally defeat production. The continuation rate is predicted and grasped not only by the combination and order of each attack production, but also by the combination of the subsequent ally victory production and ally defeat production. It is possible.

In the eleventh game of the set, the effect table for the current battle effect is selected in the processing of steps S2011 and S2012, and after the address information of the selected effect table is stored, the current After executing the processing for setting the battle effect of the game to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the sub-side AT counter is not 7 in step S2009, but the 12th game or later of the set, the process proceeds to step S2014. In step S2014, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set and the set address information of the battle presentation is the address field information (PB1 to PB8) corresponding to the ally defeat presentation. Affirmative determination in step S2014 means that although the continuation condition was not established until the battle presentation was set in the 11th game, the continuation condition was established thereafter. In this case, in step S2015, the battle effect to be performed in the current set is reselected from the continuation battle effect table, and the address information of the reselected effect table is stored (overwritten) in the address information storage area 183c. Run.

In this case, a battle presentation table for overwriting is selected from the battle presentation table for continuation according to the continuation rate of the AT mode regardless of the ally attack presentation or the enemy attack presentation executed in the previous game. By doing so, when the continuation condition is satisfied in the middle, the relationship between the combination of the ally attack effect and the enemy attack effect in the battle effect and the continuation rate is different from the case where the continuation condition is satisfied from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the interest in the game by improving the difficulty of the game in which the continuation rate is predicted. In the present embodiment, the ally attack effect and the enemy attack effect are set as a set of two games. Therefore, in the overwrite battle effect table, in this game (second game), if it is set to perform an enemy attack effect (ally attack effect) that is different from the attack effect before overwriting, in this game, before overwriting Alternatively, in this game, the performance is performed according to the overwritten production table, and even though the ally (enemy) has launched an attack, the enemy attack production You may set so that the counter production switched to (ally attack production) may be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2014, or after the processing of step S2015 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2013, and the battle effect of the current game is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 according to the value of the sub-side AT counter. After executing the processing for setting to be performed, this AT effect setting processing is terminated.

<Flow of production in AT mode>
Next, the flow of effects in each set during the AT mode will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 54 and 55. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 54, when the AT mode is started with a game of ta1, in the first set continuing to ta5, ta1 to ta3 (more precisely, the game immediately before the game started at ta3) This is the first half part in which the confrontation effect is executed, and the second half part in which the battle effect is executed from ta3 to ta5 (more precisely, the game immediately before the game started at ta5).

Further, the continuation lottery process (step S904) in the continuation determination process (FIG. 31) is performed at the start of the game ta1. For example, if the ta1 continuation lottery results in a continuation winning, the continuation flag is set. This continuation flag is cleared in the AT mode processing of the winning result handling processing in the game just before the next set continuation determination of the current set, that is, in the game immediately before the game started at ta5 (in the figure, at ta5 (shown as cleared by

When the continuation flag is set, in the first half part from ta1 to ta3, a specific effect can occur in the confrontation effect. For example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the game is that the specific effect lottery is won at ta2, which is the normal combination, and the specific effect occurs. In this case, the generated flag is set with the occurrence of the specific effect of ta2, and the specific effect does not occur in the set.

In the second half part from ta3 to ta5, the battle effect is executed, and in the final game of the battle effect, the ally victory effect is executed and the continuation condition is satisfied (continuation notification) is executed (ta4). ). In this case, the continuation notification allows the player to grasp that the next set will be started. However, as a player who understands that the continuation condition is established by the specific effect of ta3, the battle effect that starts from ta3 is the result (whether it is a victory effect or a defeat effect) It is possible to enjoy while immersed in a sense of superiority while knowing the Therefore, in order to enjoy the sense of superiority and to be relieved to know that the continuation condition is met early on, people do not miss the fact that the specific production is performed, and the degree of attention to the confrontation production. is preferably enhanced.

When the next set starts at ta5, the continuous lottery process is executed at ta5, and the continuous non-winning is assumed at ta5. In this case the continuation flag is not set. For example, in the game ta6 which is in the first half part, if an additional win is made with a special combination as a trigger, the continuation flag will be set in the game ta6.

Here, the specific effect lottery in the present embodiment is set to be executed according to the lottery result of the game regardless of whether or not the game wins the additional lottery. Performance may not occur. Therefore, for example, even if the continuation flag (and the sub-side continuation flag) is set at ta6 where the above winning is added, and the specific effect does not occur when the continuation condition is satisfied, the normal role of ta7 after that A specific production may occur as a trigger. In addition, in the figure, an example is shown in which the specific effect occurs in the ta7 game different from the ta6 game in which the additional winning was made, but naturally the specific effect occurs in the ta6 game in which the additional winning was made sometimes.

In the battle effect from ta8 to ta10, since the continuation flag is set as described above, the battle effect is performed in the effect pattern in which the continuation notification as the ally victory effect is executed at ta9 immediately before ta10. will be

When the next set starts at ta10, the continuation lottery process is similarly executed at ta10, and the continuation flag is not set if the continuation non-winning at ta10. Then, if the set started at ta10 is not won until ta13 when the set ends, the specific effect does not occur in the first half part from ta10 to ta11, and even in the battle effect from ta11 to ta13, the ta13 The battle effect is performed in the effect pattern in which the ally defeat effect is executed at immediately preceding ta12. Then, the AT mode ends at ta13.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the second half of each set, no specific effect occurs, and when looking only at the battle effect of the second half, it continues until the ally victory effect or the ally defeat effect is executed in the final game. It is set so that it cannot be determined whether the conditions are met. In other words, in a configuration in which a specific effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition can occur before the ally victory effect as the continuation notification of the establishment of the continuation condition is performed. A situation (second half part) in which the specific effect cannot occur is interposed between the situation (first half part) in which the specific effect can occur and the final game in which the continuation notification can occur. By doing so, the situation in which the specific production can occur is limited, thereby increasing the rarity of the specific production, and making it possible to draw a strong interest in the specific production. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the degree of attention to the battle production itself in the latter part is lowered due to the excessive desire for the occurrence of .

As already explained, the probability of occurrence of the specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode. FIG. 55(a) shows the AT mode with 10% continuation, and FIG. 55(b) shows the AT mode with 90% continuation.

For example, in the 10% continuous AT mode starting at tb1, the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set up to tb6, the continuation condition is not satisfied in the second set from tb6 to tb10, and the second set When the AT mode ends at , an ally victory effect is executed as a continuous notification at tb5 immediately before tb6, and an ally defeat effect is executed at tb9 immediately before tb10.

Further, for example, in the 90% continuous AT mode starting at tc1, assuming that the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set up to tc6 and in the second set from tc6 to tc10, At tc9 immediately before tc5 and tc10, a teammate victory effect is executed as continuous notification.

As already explained, the specific effect can occur in the first half of the set in which the continuation condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the 10% continuation AT mode, a specific effect can occur in the first half of the game from tb1 to tb4 in the first set, while in the second set of the first half of the game from tb6 to tb8 does not occur. On the other hand, in the 90% continuation AT mode, the specific effects are performed in the games from tc1 to tc4, which are the first half of the first set, and from tc6 to tc8, which are the first half of the second set. become possible to occur.

However, after the specific effect occurs, even in the first half part of the set where the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific effect will not occur. When the specific effect occurs in the game of tb3, the specific effect does not occur in the games from tb3 to tb4. Also, for example, in the 90% continuous AT mode, if a specific effect occurs in the game of tc2 from tc1 to tc4, or if a specific effect occurs in the game of tc7 from tc6 to tc8, from the tc2 In the games from tc4 and tc7 to tc8, the specific effect will not occur.

As mentioned above, the higher the continuation rate in AT mode, the more likely it is that a specific effect will occur. It is likely to be a game later than the game of tc2 that occurs. By doing this, a game that predicts the continuation rate of the AT mode from the number of games until the specific effect occurs is added, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the way to enjoy the AT mode. Become.

Here, as described above, in each set of the AT mode, it is considered that the player advances the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the specific effect at an earlier stage. , it is considered that the longer the player can enjoy the excitement of whether or not the specific effect will occur, the more the player can fully enjoy the game. In that respect, the period during which it is possible to enjoy whether or not the specific effect occurs is the period from tb1 to tb3 in the AT mode with 10% continuation, and the period from tc1 to tc2 in the AT mode with 90% continuation, The length of the period per set is longer in the AT mode with 10% duration. By doing so, even in the AT mode with a low continuation rate, it is possible to keep the player entertained for a longer period of time as to whether or not the specific effect will occur, and thus the amusement of the game can be favorably improved.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a situation where the condition for continuing the AT mode set is satisfied, a specific effect corresponding to the fact that the condition for continuing the AT mode set is satisfied according to the lottery result of each game before continuing the AT mode set. A specific performance lottery for executing By doing this, while attention is focused on whether or not the set will continue in each set of AT mode, through expecting that a specific effect corresponding to the continuation will be performed, the lottery of each game Increased attention to results.

In this case, the probability of winning the specific effect lottery differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode, and the higher the continuation rate, the easier it is to win the specific effect lottery. In addition to indicating that the AT mode continues at a high rate, depending on the timing of its occurrence. Therefore, by performing the specific effect, it is possible to draw attention to the game, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Although it is set so that it is easier to win the specific effect lottery when the game lottery result is a specific role than when it is a normal role including a loss, the probability that the game lottery result will be a specific role Also, considering the probability of becoming a normal role, the ratio of specific effects triggered by a specific role (the product of the probability of winning a specific role and the probability of winning a specific effect lottery at the time of a specific role) Since the ratio of the specific production to be performed (the product of the winning probability of the normal role and the winning probability of the specific production during the normal role) is set to be larger, the lottery result of each game is the normal role. Even in such a case, it is possible to make the player look forward to the occurrence of the specific effect.

In this case, each set of the AT mode has 18 games, and among them, the number of games in which the specific effect can occur is 10 games in which the confrontation effect is performed. The denominator of the probability of winning the normal role is set to be smaller than 10, and the denominator of the probability of winning the special role is set to be larger than 10. Because of this probability, there are not many opportunities to win a special role in each set, and on the other hand, there are frequent opportunities to win a regular role. In addition, the effect of increasing the attention of each game before continuing the set using the specific effect can be more favorably achieved.

After the specific effect is executed, the generated flag is set, and the specific effect can occur only once per set, so the rarity of the specific effect is increased and the specific effect is not overlooked. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific performance by utilizing the player's psychology to try.

Since the performance mode of the specific performance is different in each game in which the confrontation performance is performed, there is a high possibility that the specific performance will be overlooked as compared with a configuration in which the specific performance is performed in the same performance mode. By doing so, the degree of attention to the specific performance can be increased, and furthermore, in the configuration in which success or failure of the continuation condition is notified by the battle performance after that, the degree of attention to the battle performance can also be increased.

In a set in which the continuation condition is not established, the continuation condition can be established by winning the additional lottery in the AT addition processing according to the lottery result of each game. In this case, if the additional lottery is won, the specific effect can occur during the confrontation effect, so it is possible to closely associate the lottery result of each game with the occurrence of the specific effect. It is also possible to give the impression that the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game without going through the continuation lottery when updating the set.

In the add-on lottery, it is set so that the add-on winning is won in the specific role but not in the normal role. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the event that the set is not continued even though the special role as a so-called rare role is won, and the relationship between the special role and the success or failure of the continuation condition can be made difficult. can be secured.

However, in this embodiment, even if the continuation condition is satisfied by the additional winning, the specific production will not be performed unless the specific production lottery is won, and the execution of the specific production may be limited when the additional winning is won. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the specific effect is performed in the normal combination, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game in which the normal combination is won.

The winning probability of the additional lottery is common regardless of the continuation rate of the AT mode. On the premise of such a configuration, by making a configuration that gives the impression that the continuation condition is satisfied according to the lottery result of each game by the specific effect, even in the AT mode with a low continuation rate In fact, there are cases where the AT mode is continued depending on the player's decision, and the effect of giving the impression that the continuation condition is satisfied according to the lottery result of each game can be enhanced.

Also, during the battle production, even if the continuation condition is satisfied by winning additional prizes, the specific production is not performed, so the result of the battle production that is performed over multiple games can be understood in the middle. It becomes possible to ensure that the attention to the battle production is favorably secured.

In the AT mode set, a specific performance corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition of the set can be executed during the confrontation performance, and after that, the set is updated through a battle performance in which the specific performance cannot be executed. . By doing so, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to overlap of a specific effect as an advance notification that the continuation condition is satisfied and a battle effect that notifies the success or failure of the continuation condition, and each effect It is possible to preferably expect the production effect of.

In this case, in the AT effect setting process, regardless of whether or not the specific effect is executed during the confrontation effect, the effect pattern of the current battle effect is determined from each battle effect table based on the success or failure of the continuation condition. . By doing so, for example, there is no need to store in advance the effect pattern when the specific effect is performed, and for example, even if the specific effect is performed, the specific effect may be overlooked. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of noticing the overlooked thing afterward through the performance of the battle performance of the performance pattern when the specific performance is performed. In this case, in order to solve such an inconvenience, it is conceivable to take measures to make the specific effect more flashy so that the specific effect is not overlooked. If the performance pattern of the performance is determined, it is possible to perform the mode of performance on the premise that the specific performance can be overlooked, and the improvement of the degree of attention to the specific performance can be boosted.

In the continuation determination process on the main controller 101 side, only the continuation rate is referred to when updating the AT mode set, and the lottery result of the game at the time of updating is not referred to. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult for people to notice that the continuous lottery is being held when the set is renewed, and it gives the impression that the continuous lottery is being held according to the lottery results of each subsequent game. It is possible to help give.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described first embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game is an additional winning game (regardless of whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set), the specific effect is performed through the specific effect lottery, but this is not the case. In the modified example, a configuration will be described in which a specific effect is positively performed in a game in which an extra win is made. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing AT effect setting processing in this modified example.

In this modification, after executing the process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received in step S2202. If a continuation command has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S2203. The processing of these steps S2201 to S2203 is the same as the processing of steps S2001 to S2003. In this modification, after setting the sub-side continuation flag in step S2203, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 8 to 16 in step S2204. It is determined whether or not it is the 10th game. If it is the 2nd game to the 10th game, in step S2205, a process of setting a specific effect flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. The specific effect flag is a flag for generating a specific effect in a game in which an extra win is made.

When a negative determination is made in step S2202 or step S2204, or after the processing of step S2205 is executed, processing for setting the effects in the current game is executed in steps S2206 to S2215. The processing of steps S2206 to S2215 is the same as the processing of steps S2004 to S2013 except for the specific effect setting processing of step S2209.

In the specific effect setting process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. exit. When the generated flag is not set and the specific effect is not generated in this set, it is determined whether or not the specific effect flag is set in step S2302. If not set, in steps S2303 to S2309, processing for generating a specific effect is executed. The processing of steps S2303 to S2309 is the same as the processing of steps S2102 to S2108.

When the specific effect flag is set in step S2302, the process of clearing the specific effect flag is executed in step S2310. Then, the process proceeds to step S2308 to execute processing for grasping the specific effect corresponding to the sub-side AT counter, and after executing the processing to set the generated flag in step S2309, this specific effect setting process is terminated. do. In this case, in the confrontation effect setting process of step S2210, the confrontation effect corresponding to the specific effect is set.

By doing so, in the case of a set that has not been won in the continuation lottery, if the game is the first half part, the specific performance will be generated in the game if the game is the first half part when the special role is the trigger. Therefore, the lottery result of each game and the occurrence rate of the specific effect are more closely related, and the continuous lottery is performed based on the lottery result of each game, not the result of the continuous lottery performed when each set is updated. It is also possible to strengthen the impression that the result of the continuation lottery is notified by the specific effect.

In a game in which a continuation lottery is performed, even if an additional lottery is won, a specific performance flag is not set and a specific performance is prevented from occurring without going through the specific performance lottery. In other words, the continuation command is output even if the continuation lottery is won, but in a game where the continuation lottery is performed, even if the continuation command is received, the sub-side continuation flag is only set, and the specific effect flag is not set. made it In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the display control device 81 does not dare to distinguish between winning the set continuation lottery and winning the additional lottery, an increase in the number of types of commands is avoided. However, it is possible to perform the specific effect without contradiction with a relatively simple configuration.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the additional lottery is not won in a situation where the continuation condition is established, a specific effect is generated. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing in this modification.

In the AT add-on process in this modified example, the process when it is determined that the add-on win has not been made in step S2404 is different. That is, if a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set in step S2410. If the continuation flag is set, it is determined in step S2411 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is any special combination. If the continuation flag is not set in step S2410, or if the continuation flag is set in step S2411 but it is a normal combination, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the continuation flag is set and the additional lottery triggered by the specific role is not won, then in step S2412, a process of setting the non-win command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. , the AT addition processing ends.

The processing of steps S2401 to S2409 is the same as the processing of steps S1001 to S1009.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing specific effect setting processing in this modified example.

In this modification, if the generated flag is not set in step S2501, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the non-winning command has been received as the command at the start of the current game. When the non-winning command is not received, a process for generating a specific effect is executed in steps S2503 to S2509. The processes in steps S2501 and S2503 to S2509 are the same as the processes in steps S2201 to S2108.

On the other hand, in step S2502, the above non-winning command is received, and although the continuation condition has already been satisfied in the first half of the set, in this game, the additional lottery triggered by the specific role is not won. and the specific effect has not yet been generated, an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, and the process proceeds to step S2508. Then, in step S2508, a process for grasping the specific effect corresponding to the sub-side AT counter is executed, and in step S2509, a process for setting a generated flag is executed, and then this specific effect setting process is terminated. . In this case, in the confrontation effect setting process of step S2210, the confrontation effect corresponding to the specific effect is set.

By doing so, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the specific effect in the game in which the specific role is won without excessively increasing the winning probability of the additional lottery. Therefore, by performing a specific effect in the game in which the specific role is won, the set continuation lottery can be boosted to give the impression that it is being done in each game instead of when the set is renewed. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of each game in the set.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the effect table of the battle effect selected in the second half part can be changed depending on whether or not the specific effect occurs in the first half part of the set. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in this modified example.

In this modification, the sub-side AT counter is 7, and the processing of the start game of the second half part (the 11th game of the set) is different. In other words, the processing for the first half of steps S2601 to S2608 is the same as the processing of steps S2001 to S2008. If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined in step S2609 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 7 and it is the start game of the second half part.

If the determination in step S2609 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2610 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag has been set. judge. As already explained, the generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that a specific effect has occurred in the first half of the set.

If the occurrence completion flag is not set and the specific effect does not occur even if the continuation condition is met, in step S2612, the effect table for the current battle effect is selected from the battle effect tables for continuation, and the selection is made. A process for storing the address information of the effect table is executed. This process is the same as the process of step S2011, and the effect table is selected by lottery according to the continuation rate of the AT mode this time.

On the other hand, in step S2611, if the generated flag is set, the continuation condition is satisfied, and a specific effect is generated, then in step S2613 a predetermined specific effect is generated from the continuation battle effect table. is selected as the effect table for the current battle effect, and processing for storing the address information of the selected effect table is executed. In this modification, the effect table of the address information PA1 is set as the specific effect table. A battle effect of the effect pattern in which the effect is performed is executed.

If the sub-side continuation flag is not set in step S2610, then in step S2614, the effect table for the current battle effect is selected from the non-continuing battle effect tables, and the address information of the selected effect table is stored. to run. Also, in step S2609, if the sub-side AT counter is not 7, it is determined whether or not the continuation condition has been established after the transition to the battle effect in step S2616, and if the continuation condition is established after the fact, If there is, in step S2617, processing for rewriting the effect table is executed. Then, after executing any one of the processes of steps S2612 to S2614 and step S2617, or when a negative determination is made in step S2616, in step S2615 the battle effect setting process of the current game is executed, and then this End the AT effect setting process. The processing of steps S2614 to S2617 is the same as the processing of steps S2012 to S2015.

By doing so, even though the occurrence of the specific effect is known, the battle effect in which there is a high possibility that the ally character will be defeated is not performed, and the contradiction of the effect is prevented. In addition, since it is not necessary to select an effect pattern for the battle effect even when the specific effect is generated, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the battle effect.

Moreover, with the above configuration, when the specific effect occurs, it becomes impossible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode from the effect pattern of the battle effect. By doing so, it is possible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode purely from the occurrence timing and occurrence rate of the specific effect without relying on other information such as the effect pattern of the battle effect. It is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the performance.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, after the specific effect occurs, the suggested effect of the set value occurs according to the lottery result of the game. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing the suggestive effect setting process in this modified example. Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, in this modified example, as the effect setting of the first half part in the AT effect setting process, after performing the confrontation effect setting process of step S2008, the suggestive effect setting process of FIG. 61 is executed. do. That is, the suggestive effect setting process is a process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 as one process in the effect setting process for the first half of the AT mode.

In the suggestive effect setting process, it is determined in step S2701 whether or not the generated flag is set. If it is not set, the suggestive effect setting process is terminated as it is. That is, in this modified example, the suggestive effect is not generated in a situation where the specific effect is not generated. If the occurrence completion flag is set, the process advances to step S2702.

In step S2702, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, and in step S2703, the process of grasping the setting value is executed. Then, in step S2704, the continuation rate of the current AT mode is grasped, in step S2705, a process of acquiring a suggestive effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S2706, a suggestive effect lottery process is executed.

As shown in FIG. 62, the suggestive effect table in this modified example is set such that the probability of occurrence of the suggestive effect differs according to the set value, the continuation rate, and the lottery result of the game. Specifically, it is set so that the suggestive effect can occur when the lottery result of the game is a losing result, and is set so that the suggestive effect does not occur for other results. In addition, the higher the set value of the payout rate (the higher the setting), the more likely the suggestive effect will occur, and the higher the AT mode with a higher continuation rate, the more likely the suggestive effect will occur. It is

It should be noted that the suggestion production in this modification is a production that suggests a high setting, and is set as a production that suggests a high continuation rate. An effect may be provided to suggest that the set value is reached, or an effect may be provided to confirm that the set value is a predetermined value (for example, setting 6) when it occurs.

After executing the suggestive effect lottery process in step S2706, it is determined whether or not the suggestive effect lottery is won in step S2707. or the speaker 64, and then the suggestive effect setting process is terminated. Although detailed description with reference to drawings is omitted, the suggestive effect may be, for example, a mode in which the content of the effect on the auxiliary display section 65 is different from that during non-occurrence (for example, a predetermined character appears), or a speaker. A mode in which the sound effect from 64 is different from that when not generated (for example, a special sound effect is generated), or a mode in which these modes are combined may be used. If it is determined in step S2707 that the game has not been won, the suggestion effect setting process is terminated.

In this way, by performing a specific effect, it is possible to perform a suggestive effect of the set value after that, so that the performance of the specific effect makes it possible to grasp the level of the continuation rate and the success or failure of the continuation condition. In addition, by using the player's psychology to grasp the set value as an opportunity to start the suggestive performance of the set value, it is possible to improve the expectation for the performance of the specific performance.

In this case, after the specific effect is performed, a suggestive effect can occur according to the lottery result of the game, so the specific effect aiming at the effect of increasing the attention to the lottery result of each game is performed. It is also possible to maintain the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game even after the game has been completed.

Furthermore, since the suggestive effect is performed based on the result of the failure, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the number of medals held, and it is possible to eliminate the negative image of the result of failure. Since the probability of the outcome can be made relatively high, it is also possible to suppress an excessively high ball payout rate by, for example, making it difficult for the outcome to be a failure.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the effect content of each set in the AT mode is changed. In this modification, in a set management type AT mode in which one set is a set of 18 games as a predetermined number, if the conditions for continuing to the next set are met, a predetermined specific effect is given until the 18 games are completed. occurs and the conditions for continuation to the next set are not met, the AT mode ends without the specific effect occurring before 18 games are completed. In order to distinguish the specific effect in this modified example from the specific effect in the first embodiment, the specific effect in this modified example will also be referred to as a second specific effect in the following description. In the following description, when a specific effect (a specific effect lottery, a specific effect lottery process, etc.) is referred to, it includes not only the specific effect in the first embodiment but also the second specific effect. This also applies to specific effects (third specific effect, fourth specific effect) in other embodiments.

Specifically, in the present modification, a plurality of variable regions for numerical characters are provided in the auxiliary display portion 65, and the second specific effect is produced by forming a predetermined combination of numerical characters that stop in the plurality of variable regions. Occur. For example, as shown in FIG. 63(a), as the variation areas of the numeric characters in the auxiliary display section 65, a left variation area SP1, a middle variation area SP2, and a right variation area SP3 are set in order from the left, and these variation areas SP1 Set the numeric characters from 1 to 9 as the numeric characters to be displayed in ~SP3. Then, when each game is started, the numerical characters in these variable regions SP1 to SP3 are displayed, for example, vertically variably, and each time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the numerical characters are displayed in order from the left. to stop Then, when all the characters with the same number stop in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3, the second specific effect is performed (Fig. 64(a)), and the characters with the number to stop must be aligned in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3. 63(a), 63(b)).

When the AT mode set is started, a pattern variation effect such as variation of the variation areas SP1 to SP3→stop is performed for each game. For example, as shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), when the non-second specific effect is provided and the number characters stop in the variable areas SP1 to SP3, the following game will be executed again. Design variation production is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(a), when the number characters stop in the variable areas SP1 to SP3 as the second specific effect, in the remaining games of the set, As shown, a jackpot effect is performed. In this modified example, as the jackpot effect, a close-up effect is set on the auxiliary display section 65 in which a friendly character screams. etc. may be set, and the contents of the presentation may be changed as appropriate.

In this modification, in a specific game in which the number of remaining games in one set is small (for example, from 5 remaining games to 2 remaining games) in a situation where the second specific effect has not occurred, instead of the symbol variation effect , a standby effect is performed (FIG. 65(a)). In this modified example, an effect is set as the standby effect in which the ally character is enthusiastically wearing an aura. That is, during the period in which the standby effect is performed, the symbol variation effect is not performed, and the second specific effect and the non-second specific effect do not occur. Then, in the final game, the symbol variation effect is executed again, and if the continuation condition is satisfied, the second specific effect is generated in the final game, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied. , as shown in FIG. 65(b), the non-second specific effect is generated in the final game, and the AT mode ends.

The standby effect described above can occur not only in a specific game with a small number of remaining games, but also in the middle of a set, when a predetermined lottery for occurrence is won. In this case, a standby effect is generated over a predetermined number of games (for example, 4 games) from the game in which the generation lottery is won, and then the symbol variation effect is executed. In this case, in the symbol variation effect after the predetermined number of games, the second specific effect does not occur unless the lottery for generating the second specific effect is won even if the continuation condition is satisfied.

A processing configuration for generating such a second specific effect will be described below.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing AT effect setting processing in this modified example.

In step S2801, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed. In step S2802, the display of the number of remaining games of the set displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is updated in accordance with the update of the sub-side AT counter. Specifically, in this modification, as shown in FIGS. 63 to 65, a remaining game number image GP corresponding to the number of remaining games of each set is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, upper right) of the auxiliary display section 65. In step S2802, the remaining game number image GP is updated according to the value of the sub-side AT counter.

In the subsequent step S2803, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received as the current game start command, and if it has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S2804. . If a negative determination is made in step S2803, or if the process of step S2804 has been executed, the process advances to step S2805.

In step S2805, it is determined whether or not the occurrence completion flag is set. If the generated flag is not set, the process advances to step S2805 to determine whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 1 to 4, so that the 14th game to 17th game of the set (5 remaining games to 2 remaining games) game), and it is determined whether or not it is a specific period in which the number of remaining games in the set is small and the standby effect should be executed. If the sub-side AT counter is 5 or more (before the 13th game) or if the sub-side AT counter is 0 (last game), whether or not the standby effect flag is set in the flag storage area 183a in step S2806. determine whether The standby effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the game should execute the standby effect outside the specific period, and is set when the lottery for generating the standby effect is won. If the standby effect flag is not set, the second specific effect setting process is executed in step S2807, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated. Also, when the sub-side AT counter is 1 to 4, or when the standby effect flag is set, the standby effect setting process is executed in step S2808, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated. Then, if it is determined in step S2804 that the occurrence completion flag is set, in step S2809 processing is executed to set the jackpot effect (FIG. 64(b)) to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. After that, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Second specific effect setting process>
In the second specific effect setting process, as shown in FIG. 67, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S2901. In the subsequent step S2902, a process for grasping the current AT mode continuation rate is executed. Then, at step S2903, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set. Determine whether or not it is the final game.

If it is not the final game of the set, the process advances to step S2904 to determine whether or not an occurrence standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The generation standby flag is a flag that is set when the generation lottery for the second specific performance is won during execution of the standby performance. When the occurrence waiting flag is not set, in step S2906, the process of acquiring the second specific effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S2907, the second specific effect lottery process is executed. As shown in FIG. 69, the second specific effect table, like the specific effect table of FIG. 51, determines the winning probability of the second specific effect lottery based on the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. It is set so that not only the specific combination but also the normal combination including the result of losing can be won in the second specific effect lottery.

After executing the second specific effect lottery process in step S2907, it is determined whether or not the second specific effect lottery is won in step S2908. In step S2904, if it is determined that it is the final game of the set, if it is determined that the second specific effect lottery has been won in step S2908, or if the occurrence standby flag is set in step S2904 After making the determination and then clearing the occurrence standby flag in step S2909, processing for setting the second specific effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed in step S2910. In this case, as shown in FIG. 64(a), in the pattern variation effect of the current game, a second specific effect is generated in which characters with the same number are stopped in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3. The type of number character to be stopped in the second specific effect is randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, for example, the number characters that are likely to be selected are changed according to the value of the AT set counter (the number of remaining continuous sets). may be stopped together, and if the AT set counter is less than a predetermined number, even-numbered characters may be stopped together. Further, for example, the number characters that are likely to be selected are made different according to the continuation rate of the AT mode. If the AT set counter is less than a predetermined rate, the even-numbered characters may be stopped together. Furthermore, characters with numbers that are likely to be selected are made different according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process. The characters may stop together, and if the set value is less than a predetermined number, the even-numbered characters may stop together. Moreover, you may combine these.

Thereafter, after setting the generated flag in step S2911, the second specific effect setting process is terminated. By setting the generated flag, in the AT effect setting process of the next game, affirmative determination is made in step S2804, and the process for setting the jackpot effect in step S2808 is performed. When the second specific effect set as described above is the final game of the set, the next game is the first game of the updated set, and the symbol variation effect is started again.

If it is determined at step S2903 that the sub-side continuation flag has not been set, or if it is determined at step S2908 that the second specific effect lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2912. In step S2912, processing for setting so that the non-second specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), in the symbol variation effect of the current game, there is a non-second specific effect in which characters with the same number do not align in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 and stop. Occur. Note that the number characters that stop in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, in order to maintain the anticipation of the occurrence of the second specific effect until the end of the game, the numbered characters that stop in the left variation area SP1 and the middle variation area SP2 are set to be the same, and the right variation area SP3 is used. The out-of-reach mode (Fig. 63 (a)) in which the number characters that stop at the end are different is the difference mode (Fig. 63 ( It is preferable to make it easier to be selected than b)).

In the following step S2913, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is greater than 10 and it is the 1st to 7th games of the set. If it is up to the 7th game, in step S2914, standby effect generation lottery processing is executed. In the standby effect generating lottery process, a standby effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and whether or not to generate the standby effect is decided by lottery according to the lottery result of the current game. As shown in FIG. 69, the standby effect table is set so that the harder the game lottery results are, the easier it is to win the standby effect lottery. However, it can be said that it is set not to win in the normal role.

At step S2915, it is determined whether or not the standby effect lottery has been won. When it is elected, in step S2916, the process of inputting 4 to the waiting effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed, and in step S2917 the process of setting the waiting effect flag is executed. , ends the second specific effect setting process. It should be noted that the value input in step S2916 corresponds to the number of games in which the standby effect is performed. is determined.

Then, by setting the standby effect flag in step S2917, in the AT effect setting process of the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, and the standby effect setting process of step S2808 is performed. If it is the 8th game or later in step S2913, or if the standby effect lottery is not won in step S2915, the second specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<Standby effect setting process>
Next, the standby effect setting process in step S2808 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, and in step S3002, processing of grasping the continuation rate of the AT mode of this time is executed. Then, in step S3003, it is determined whether or not the standby effect counter is greater than 0, and if it is greater than 0, that is, the standby effect set in the current game is triggered by winning the standby effect lottery. If it is a waiting effect, in step S3004, the process of subtracting 1 from the waiting effect counter is executed. Then, in step S3005, it is determined whether or not the standby effect counter has become 0, and when it becomes 0, a process of clearing the standby effect flag is executed in step S3006.

If a negative determination is made in step S3005 or after the processing of step S3006 is executed, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set. , it is determined whether or not the occurrence waiting flag is set. If the generation waiting flag is not set, in step S3009, the process of acquiring the second specific effect table is executed, and in step S3010, the second specific effect lottery process is executed. The processing of steps S3009 and S3010 is the same as the processing of steps S2906 and S2907.

After the process of step S3010 is executed, it is determined whether or not the second specific effect lottery is won in step S3011, and if the lottery is won, the process of setting an occurrence standby flag is performed in step S3012. Run. As a result of this processing, affirmative determination is made in step S2905, and the second specific effect is generated in the first game after the execution of the standby effect based on the final game of the AT mode set or the standby effect lottery. become.

If the standby effect counter is 0 in step S3003 and the standby effect set in the current game is a standby effect triggered by the fact that the number of remaining games in the set has become small, or if the sub-side in step S3007 If the continuation flag is not set, if the occurrence standby flag is set at step S3008, if it is determined that the second specific effect lottery is not won at step S3011, and the processing of step S3012 is executed. After either of the cases, after executing the process of setting so that the standby effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 in step S3013, the standby effect setting process is terminated.

That is, during the 4 games from the remaining 5 games to the remaining 2 games of the set, or between the 4 games after winning the standby effect generation lottery, regardless of the result of the second specific effect lottery process, the pattern variation effect is not the standby. A performance is held. In this case, the pattern variation effect performed in the final game of the set (one remaining game) will be the second specific effect if the continuation condition of this set is satisfied, and will not be the second specific effect if the continuation condition is not satisfied. It becomes a performance. On the other hand, the pattern variation effect performed in the first game after the standby effect triggered by winning the standby effect generation lottery is the total game including the 4 games in which the standby effect was executed. The second specific effect can occur depending on the result of the second specific effect lottery, and the probability is overwhelmingly higher than the occurrence rate of the second specific effect in other games (see FIG. 69).

As described above, by performing the specific effect (second specific effect) in each game with the symbol variation effect, it is possible to more clearly notify whether or not the second specific effect has occurred in the current game. This makes it easier for the player to have the impression that it is determined whether the continuation condition is established according to the lottery result of each game. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of each game.

In this case, a standby performance in which no pattern variation performance is performed can be generated, and a second specific performance lottery is performed even in a game in which the standby performance is performed, and when the second specific performance lottery is won. Since the second specific effect is performed in the first game after the standby effect, the degree of attention to the symbol variation effect in the first game after the standby effect is dramatically increased. In addition, even when the number of remaining games in each set becomes small, the standby effect is executed, and the final game of the set is the first game after the standby effect. In relation to the waiting effect obtained, it has succeeded in increasing the attention to the final game of the set.

That is, the game in which the standby effect is performed is a game in which the execution of the second specific effect is restricted, and even in the game in which the execution of such a second specific effect is restricted, the second specific effect lottery itself is performed. By doing so, it is possible to make the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the second specific effect different depending on each game in which the symbol variation effect is performed, not limited to the final game of the set.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, in a set management type AT mode in which a set of 18 games is set as a predetermined number, 10 games, which is a smaller number than the 18 games, is set as one set of effects, and one set of effects is set. When a specific performance occurs at the time, it is configured to shift to a new performance set at that time. In addition, in order to distinguish the specific effect in this embodiment from the specific effect (second specific effect) in the first embodiment, the specific effect in this embodiment is also referred to as a third specific effect. In addition, in order to distinguish the performance set set for the 10th game from the AT mode set set for the 18th game, the AT mode set is also called an AT set, and the performance set is also called a pseudo set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(a), in this embodiment, when the AT mode is started, an opening effect is performed over eight games in the first AT set. In the opening effect, for example, as shown in FIG. Display (OP game number image OG).

When the 8 games for the opening effect are finished, the pseudo set is started. In the pseudo set, as shown in FIG. 70(a), using the pattern variation effect in the first embodiment, a third specific effect and a An effect is produced in which any one of the non-third specific effects is generated in which the characters of the same number do not align in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 and stop.

As shown in FIG. 70(b1), when performing a pseudo-set effect, the number-of-remaining-games image GP in the first embodiment is displayed in association with the number of remaining games of the pseudo-set. For example, the remaining game number image GP in FIG. 70(b1) shows the first game (remaining 10 games) in the pseudo set, and the display of the remaining game number image GP is updated at the start of the game.

In the effects in the pseudo set, as shown in FIG. 70(b2), the third specific effect occurs before the final game in which the number-of-remaining-games image GP becomes 1, and as shown in FIG. In some cases, the third specific effect is not generated until the final game in which the number-of-games image GP is 1, and the non-third specific effect is repeatedly executed.

When the third specific effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 70(b3), an update effect is generated to indicate a shift to the next pseudo set. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b4), after the update effect has occurred, the number of remaining games in the next pseudo set is reset to 10, and 10 is displayed as the number of remaining games image GP. Also, the number-of-sets image CP indicating the number of pseudo sets is displayed after being updated to a value corresponding to the number of sets of the next pseudo set (updated from 2 to 3 in the figure). In this way, when the third specific effect occurs before the final game in the pseudo set, the number of remaining games in the pseudo set is newly set regardless of the number of remaining games in the pseudo set, which is the third specified effect. It will be repeated as long as the production occurs.

In this case, the update effect indicating the transition to the next pseudo set can be said to be a continuation notification for notifying that the condition for continuing the pseudo set is satisfied. However, the continuation notification in the first embodiment is for informing that the condition for continuation of the set managed by the main controller 101 is satisfied, while the continuation notification in the present embodiment is for display control. This is for notifying that the condition for continuation of the pseudo set managed by the device 81 is satisfied, and in that respect the continuation notification in the present embodiment can also be referred to as pseudo continuation notification.

When the third specific effect does not occur until the final game of the pseudo set, as shown in FIG. 70(b6), a non-update effect indicating that the pseudo set is not updated occurs. After the non-renewal effect occurs, the ending effect is executed over seven games as shown in FIG. 70(a), and the AT mode ends after the ending effect ends.

As the ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), a effect is set in which the face of the ally character whose eyes are closed is displayed close-up on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. Also in the ending effect, the ED game number image EG is displayed corresponding to the number of remaining games of the ending effect, and the display of the ED game number image EG is updated as the game is completed.

Before the number of remaining games of the ending effect becomes 0, if the continuation condition is met by winning an extra lottery or the like, the ally character will be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. 71(c). After the resurrection effect in which the spread view is displayed, the effect by the pseudo set is resumed.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for performing each effect in this embodiment will be described.

<Processing for precursor mode>
First, changes in processing on the main controller 101 side in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the portent mode processing in the winning result handling processing is different from that of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, in this embodiment, the precursor counter becomes 0 in step S3102, and it is determined in step S3104 that the current precursor mode was the precursor mode triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery. A part of the processing for starting the AT mode is different. That is, in step S3109, the AT mode winning flag is cleared, in step S3110, the AT mode flag is set, in step S3111, the current AT mode continuation rate is set, and in step S3112, one set of AT mode Set the number of games in the eye as 18. Then, in this embodiment, in step S3113, after executing the process of adding 1 to the AT set counter, in step S3114, the process of setting the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. . The processing of steps S3101 to S3112 and step S3114 is the same as the processing of steps S1201 to S1213.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the set management type AT mode in which one set of 18 games is set, the continuation condition is always established in the first set.

On the other hand, also in the present embodiment, the main controller 101 side executes the processing for updating the AT set (continuation determination processing) every 18 games, and if the condition for continuing the AT set is satisfied, the AT Perform processing to switch to a new AT set after completing 18 games of the set, and end AT mode after completing 18 games of the AT set if the conditions for continuing the AT set are not met. process (AT mode process).

<AT effect setting processing>
Next, changes in the AT effect setting process on the display control device 81 side in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3201, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed. The sub-side AT counter corresponds to the AT game counter on the main controller 101 side, as in the first embodiment, and corresponds to the number of remaining games in each set on the main controller 101 side. there is In the following step S3202, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received as a command at the start of the current game, and if it has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S3203.

If a negative determination is made in step S3202, or if the process of step S3203 has been executed, the process advances to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether the sub-side set counter is 1 or not. As in the first embodiment, the sub-side set counter corresponds to the number of AT mode sets set on the main controller 101 side. It is determined whether there is

If it is the first set, the process advances to step S3205 to determine whether the sub-side AT counter is 10 to 17 and it is the 1st to 8th games of the first set in the AT mode. If it is the 1st to 8th games of the 1st set of the AT mode, a process for performing an opening effect is executed in steps S3206 to S3208, and if it is the 9th game of the 1st set of the AT mode or later. After executing the process for performing the third specific effect in step S3209, the AT effect setting process is ended.

That is, if it is the 1st to 8th games of the 1st set, it is determined in step S3206 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 10 and it is the 8th game. If it is the eighth game, in step S3207, a process of setting 10 to the pseudo AT counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The pseudo AT counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the pseudo set. In step S3206, if the game to be started this time is the eighth game of the first set in the AT mode, it means that the pseudo set will start from the next game. This is a process for setting in advance the number of games of the pseudo set to be started from .

If a negative determination is made in step S3206, or after the processing of step S3207 is executed, the processing of setting the opening effect (FIG. 71(a)) to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step S3208. is performed, the AT effect setting process is terminated. In the process for performing the opening effect, the process for updating the display of the number of games (OP game number image OG) until the start of the pseudo set is also performed based on the sub-side AT counter.

If it is determined in step S3204 that the sub-side set counter is not 1 and it is not the first set in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, it is determined whether or not an ending flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The ending flag is a flag that is set when the number of games in the pseudo set is completed without the third specific effect occurring as described above, and the ending effect (FIG. 71(b)) should be performed. If the ending flag is not set, a third specific effect setting process is executed in step S3209.

On the other hand, if the ending flag has been set, the flow advances to step S3211 to determine whether or not the sub-side continuation flag has been set. When the ending flag is set and the sub-side continuation flag is set, the continuation condition is established by winning the extra lottery on the side of the main control unit 101 after the end of the pseudo-set effect. means that If the sub-side continuation flag is not set, in step S3212, the process of setting the ending effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is performed, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated. In addition, in the processing for performing the ending effect, processing for updating the display of the number of games until the end of the ending effect (ED game number image EG) is also performed based on the sub-side AT counter.

Also, in step S3211, when it is determined that the continuation condition is established by winning the extra lottery on the main control unit 101 side after the end of the effect by the pseudo set, the process of clearing the ending flag is executed in step S3213. After that, in step S3214, a process for setting the resurrection effect (FIG. 71(c)) to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is performed, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Third specific effect setting process>
In the third specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 74, first, in step S3301, a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo effect counter is executed. Execute the process to update the . In the subsequent step S3303, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set.

If the sub-side continuation flag is set, it is determined in step S3304 whether or not the pseudo AT counter is 0 and the game to be started this time is the final game of the pseudo set (the 10th game of the pseudo set). do. If it is not the final game, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S3305, the continuation rate of AT mode is grasped in step S3306, and the third specific effect table is obtained from the table storage area 182a in step S3307. Then, in step S3308, the third specific effect lottery process is executed. The processing of steps S3305 to S3308 corresponds to the processing of steps S2102 to S2105.

As shown in FIG. 75, the third specific effect table in this embodiment is set so that the rate of occurrence of the third specific effect differs depending on the result of the game lottery and the continuation rate of the AT mode. As a result, it is set so that the third specific effect is more likely to occur as the result is less likely to be won, and the third specific effect is more likely to occur as the continuation rate of the AT mode is higher. In addition, the lottery result of the game is set so that the third specific effect can occur not only for a specific role as a so-called rare role, but also for a normal role including the result of losing, and the lottery result of the game. The occurrence rate of the third specific effect according to each lottery result calculated from the product of the winning probability and the winning probability of the third specific effect lottery is set so that the normal role is higher than the specific role. ing.

In addition, in relation to the AT mode continuation rate, the higher the continuation rate in each lottery result, the more likely the third specific effect will occur. The occurrence rate of the effect is also high, and the continuation rate is set so that the higher the probability of the third specific effect occurring before the final game (by the 9th game) as a pseudo set, the higher the continuation rate. That is, as the AT mode with a higher continuation rate, the third specific effect occurs in a smaller number of games in the pseudo set, and it becomes easier to move to the next pseudo set. The number of pseudo sets tends to increase in the AT mode of the continuation rate. By doing so, the difference in the number of pseudo sets tends to be larger than the difference between the actual number of AT sets when the continuation rate is high and the actual number of AT sets when the continuation rate is low. . Therefore, the difference in the number of pseudo-sets in appearance is larger than the difference in the actual number of balls released (the difference in the number of AT mode games and sets actually played) due to the high and low continuation rate of AT mode, and the continuation rate is high. It is possible to prevent the payout rate from rising while appropriately performing the performance when is selected.

After executing the third specific effect lottery process in step S3308, it is determined whether or not the third specific effect lottery is won in step S3309. If the third specific effect lottery is won, a process for setting the third specific effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step S3310. Further, when it is determined in step S3304 that the sub-side continuation flag is set and it is the final game of the pseudo set, processing for performing the third specific effect is executed in step S3310.

In subsequent step S3311, after the third specific effect set in step S3310, the update effect (FIG. 70(b3)) is set to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. Then, after executing the process of inputting 10 to the pseudo AT counter in step S3312, the third specific effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the sub-side continuation flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S3313. In step S3313, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and the game to be started this time is a game updated to a new set on the main controller 101 side (first game of AT set). If it is not a new set update game, in step S3314, a process of setting so that the non-third specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. Then, in step S3315, it is determined whether or not the pseudo AT counter is 0 and the game to be started this time is the final game of the pseudo set (the tenth game of the pseudo set). If it is the final game, in step S3316, after the non-third specific effect set in step S3314, the non-updated effect (FIG. 70(b6)) is set to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the processing to be performed. Then, after executing the process of setting the ending flag in step S3317, the third specific effect setting process is terminated. By setting the ending flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 from the next game, and the ending effect is performed. If it is not the final game of the pseudo set in step S3315, the third specific effect setting process is terminated.

Here, a case will be described in which it is determined that it is the first game of the relevant AT set in a situation where an affirmative determination is made in step S3313 and the sub-side continuation flag is not set. In this case, the process advances to step S3310 to execute setting processing for generating the third specific effect. In other words, when the main controller 101 side does not win the continuation lottery performed when the AT mode set is updated, the third specific effect is generated in the game. Then, the third specific effect is generated in the first game of the final set of the AT mode (the set not won in the continuation lottery), and the pseudo set is started from the second game of the final set. Then, the non-third specified effect is executed over 10 games in the pseudo set, and the non-updated effect is performed after the non-third specified effect in the 11th game of the AT set which is the final game of the pseudo set. After that, the ending effect is executed over seven games from the 12th game of the AT set, and the AT mode ends. By doing so, regardless of the number of games in each set of the AT mode on the main control device 101 side, even though the pseudo set is updated and the like is performed in the effect, the third specific set is performed in the final set of the AT mode. It is possible to perform a pseudo set in which no production occurs.

<Update of AT mode set and update of pseudo set>
How the AT mode set is updated on the main controller 101 side and how the pseudo set is updated on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

When the AT mode is started at td1, in the first set of the AT mode from td1, the opening effect is performed until td2, which is the seventh game (remaining 12 games). From td3, which is the 8th game (11 remaining games) in the 1st set, the pseudo set effect is performed.

As already explained, in the situation where the continuation flag (sub-side continuation flag) is set, in the pseudo set effect, regardless of the number of remaining games in one set managed by the main controller 101 side, the lottery result of the game or the continuation rate of the AT mode. And regardless of the continuation rate of AT mode, the third specific effect occurs.

For example, in the first set of the AT mode started from td1, when the third specific effect occurs in the game of td4 before the number of remaining games in the pseudo set becomes 0, the pseudo set is passed through the update effect. is updated. Then, from the next game td5, the next pseudo set is started with 10 remaining games. Then, when the number of remaining games in the AT mode started from td1 becomes 0 at td6, the continuation flag is set, so the processing for updating the set (steps S1404 to S1406) is executed, and the next step is performed. The second set starts from the game of td7. Then, at td7, a continuation lottery is executed when the set is updated. For example, if the continuation lottery executed at td7 is won, the continuation flag is set again.

Also, for example, in the second set of the AT mode started from td7, if the third specific effect does not occur until the number of remaining games in the second set of the pseudo set becomes 0, the number of remaining games becomes 0. At td8, the third specific effect occurs. Then, the third pseudo-set is started from the next game td9.

Similarly, when the number of remaining games in the second set of the AT mode started from td7 becomes 0, since the continuation flag is set, the process for updating the set is performed as described above, and td10. 3rd set will start. Then, if the continuation lottery held at td10 is also won, the continuation flag is set again.

In the pseudo-set effect on the display control device 81 side, the pseudo-set effect (third specific effect) for updating the pseudo-set at any time is generated as described above until the continuation lottery on the main control device 101 side is not won. continue.

At td11 when the number of remaining games in the third set of the AT mode started at td10 becomes 0, the process for updating the set is performed again. However, if the continuation lottery is not won at td12 when the next 4th set is started, the continuation flag is not set.

In this case, the display control device 81 generates the third specific effect in the pseudo set effect in td12, which is the starting game of the fourth set in the AT mode. Then, a new pseudo set (seventh set) is started from td13, which is the game following the game at td12 in which the third specific effect is generated. In the 7th pseudo set, the non-third specific effect occurs over 10 games, and the 7th pseudo set continues until td14 of the 11th game in the 4th set of the AT mode. In this case, the non-update effect is generated at td14, and the ending effect is performed from td15, which is the next game of the current game. The ending effect continues over seven games, and ends together with the AT mode at td16 when the number of remaining AT mode games becomes zero.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the set management type AT mode, a pseudo set effect is performed over 10 games, which is shorter than the number of games in the AT set, 18 games, and when a third specific effect occurs during the pseudo set effect, the pseudo set effect is performed. Made it transition to a new pseudo-set regardless of the number of games remaining in the set. By doing so, the pseudo-set effect is performed with the number of repetitions greater than the number of repetitions of the AT set, and while the effect of giving the impression that the AT mode continues for a long time is expected, the final performance of the AT mode is also expected. It is possible to well match the game with the end of the pseudo-set presentation.

More specifically, the number of remaining games in AT mode is 18 games, which is more than 10 games, which is the number of games to be continued in pseudo set production (the first game of AT set in which the continuation conditions are not satisfied, the remaining games are pseudo set The number of games is less than twice the 10 games of ), the third specific effect is generated to update the pseudo set. By doing so, if the third specific effect is not generated in the updated pseudo set, the pseudo set effect can be terminated when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches 8 games. Become. In this case, in the present embodiment, the ending effect is performed for the remaining seven games, and it is possible to adjust the end game of the AT mode and the end game of the pseudo set effect without discomfort.

In the AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the number of games for performing a new pseudo set is ensured even if the pseudo set is updated in any game. Therefore, in the AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the third specific effect is generated through the third specific effect lottery process, so the timing at which the third specific effect occurs during the pseudo set effect It is possible to generate randomness in the game in which the update is performed, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of the pseudo-set effect.

In this case, the main control device 101 determines whether the conditions for continuing the AT mode are met, and the display control device 81 performs the simulated set effects. The configuration is such that whether the success or failure of the continuation condition is grasped and whether the third specific performance is generated at random in the pseudo set performance or when the AT set is updated is differentiated. By doing so, it is possible to manage whether or not to continue the AT mode, and to perform the effects during the AT mode by separate control devices, thereby decentralizing the functions, while effectively ending the AT mode game. It is possible to adjust the ending game of the pseudo-set presentation.

In particular, on the display control device 81 side, the determination of whether or not to generate the third specific effect without going through the third specific effect lottery process is the first game of the AT set, so the determination is made once every 18 games. It is a configuration that only needs to be performed once. Therefore, it is possible to expect an overwhelming effect of reducing the processing load compared to a configuration in which the determination is made every game.

Also in this embodiment, the third specific effect lottery is configured to be performed according to the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. Therefore, since the lottery result of each game and the occurrence of the third specific effect are linked, it is possible for the player to obtain a sense of satisfaction that the third specific effect has been generated by his/her own trick, and the third specific effect can be obtained. It is possible to play a game of predicting the continuation rate of the AT mode from the occurrence rate of the specific effect, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the occurrence of the third specific effect.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, in the AT mode set update game (the first game in the AT set), the third specific effect is more likely to occur than in other games. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the third specific effect setting process in this modified example.

In the third specific effect setting process in this modified example, the sub-side continuation flag is set (step S3403: YES), and the content of the third specific effect lottery is different when it is not the final game of the pseudo set. Specifically, after grasping the lottery result of the current game and the continuation rate of the AT mode (steps S3405 and S3406), the sub side AT counter is 17 in step S3407, and the game to be started this time is the AT mode. It is determined whether or not it is the first game of the mode set. If it is not the first game, the third specific effect table is acquired in step S3408, and the third specific effect lottery process is executed in step S3410. The third specific effect table is the same as that of the second embodiment (FIG. 75). On the other hand, if it is the first game of the AT mode set, after acquiring the third specific effect table at the time of update from the various table storage area 182a in step S3409, the third specific effect lottery process is performed in step S3410. to run.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the updated third specific effect table, the occurrence rate of the third specific effect is set according to the game lottery result and the AT mode continuation rate, as in the case of the third specific effect table. However, when comparing the same game lottery result and the same AT mode continuation rate, the third specific effect table at the time of update is more likely to cause the third specific effect than the third specific effect table. is set. For example, in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, in the case of normal reply A, the third specific effect table has a probability of 2.0%, while the third specific effect table at the time of update has a probability of 6 The third specific effect occurs with a probability of .0%.

After executing the third specific effect lottery process in step S3410, it is determined whether or not the generation lottery is won in step S3411. Perform processing when generating Also, if the game is not won, the process advances to step S3416 to perform processing for generating a non-third specific effect. The processing of steps S3401 to S3406 and steps S3410 to S3419 is the same as the processing of steps S3301 to S3317.

As described above, on the premise that the third specific effect is generated in the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied and the pseudo set is updated, the AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied To make it difficult to perceive the occurrence of the third specific performance in the first game of an AT set as a sign that a continuation condition is not satisfied by adopting a configuration in which the third specific performance is likely to occur even in the first game. is possible, and the third specific effect in the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied can be successfully camouflaged. Therefore, it becomes difficult to guess the success or failure of the continuation condition on the AT set side, and it becomes possible to enjoy the pseudo-set presentation more purely.

<Modification 2>
In the above-described second embodiment, the number of games in which the ending effect is performed is uniformly set to a predetermined number (7), but in this modified example, it is changed. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the third specific effect setting process in this modified example.

In this modified example, the processing is different when it is determined in step S3503 that the sub-side continuation flag has not been set. That is, if a negative determination is made in step S3503, it is determined in step S3513 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and it is the first game in the AT mode set. If it is the first game, it is determined in step S3514 whether or not the pseudo AT counter is smaller than 7 and it is the fourth game or later of the pseudo set. If it is the fourth game or later, the process advances to step S3510 to execute a process for performing a third specific effect. If the game to be started this time is up to the third game of the pseudo set, the continuation rate of the AT mode is grasped in step S3515, and the setting value set in the winning probability setting process is grasped in step S3516. Then, in step S3517, a process of acquiring the ending game number table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S3518, a process of determining the number of games for the current ending effect in the AT mode by lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 80, the number-of-ending-games table is set so that the number of ending games to be selected varies depending on the AT mode continuation rate and set value. In general, the AT mode continuation rate is high. It is set so that the smaller the number of ending games, the easier it is to select, and the higher the setting value, the smaller the number of ending games is likely to be selected. For example, in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the average number of ending games is smaller when the set value is 3 or 4 than when the set value is 1 or 2, and a shorter number of games is selected. easy to be Also, even in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, the average number of ending games is smaller when the setting value is 3 or 4 than when the setting value is 1 or 2, and a shorter number of games is selected. easy to be In both cases where the set value is 1 or 2 and where the set value is 3 or 4, the number of ending games is greater in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90% than in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%. The average value becomes smaller, and a shorter number of games is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the set value is 5 or 6, for example, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the number of ending games of one game is most likely to be selected, while in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, 7 games are selected. is most likely to be selected, and the higher the continuation rate is, the more likely the number of ending games is to be selected. In other words, even if the number of ending games is short, the setting value does not tend to be high, and the setting value is set so that the setting value can be narrowed down in relation to the continuation rate of the AT mode. By doing so, it becomes more meaningful to predict the continuation rate before reaching the ending, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the third specific effect.

Here, the situation in which the ending effect is performed is, as described above, basically the case where the AT mode ends without the set continuation condition being satisfied, so the continuation rate can be grasped by the ending effect. is also difficult to become useful information for the player. However, as described above, the occurrence probability of the third specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate, and the continuation rate is configured to be predictable from the occurrence probability of the third specific effect before the ending effect occurs. Therefore, in order to predict the setting value, information on the continuation rate is required after the fact, such as predicting the setting value from the continuation rate predicted before the ending effect and the number of games in the ending effect. By making the information on the continuation rate necessary after the fact, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the third specific effect.

After lottery processing for the number of ending games is performed in step S3518, the process advances to step S3719 to perform processing for subtracting the number of ending games determined in step S3518 from 7, which is the maximum number of ending games, and the calculated value. is input to the ending wait counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The ending standby counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the game in which the third specific effect is generated in accordance with the start of the ending effect.

After executing the process of step S3519, it is determined whether or not the ending wait counter is 0 in step S3520. For example, if the number of ending games is selected as 3, the value to be input to the ending waiting counter in step S3519 is 4, and a negative determination is made in step S3520. If a negative determination is made in step S3520, the process proceeds to step S3521 and executes processing for generating a non-third specific effect. The processing of steps S3521 to S3524 is the same as the processing of steps S3314 to S3317.

If a negative determination is made in step S3513, and it is determined that it is not the first game of the set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, it is determined in step S3525 whether or not an occurrence completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. do. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the third specific effect has already been generated in the set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. If the occurrence completion flag is not set, in step S3526, a process of subtracting 1 from the ending wait counter is executed.

After executing the process of step S3526, the process advances to step S3520 to determine whether or not the ending wait counter has become zero. If not 0, as described above, the flow advances to step S3521 to perform processing for generating the non-third specific effect. When the ending waiting counter becomes 0, after executing the process of clearing the generated flag in step S3527, the process proceeds to step S3510 and executes the process for generating the third specific effect. The processing of steps S3501 to S3512 is the same as the processing of steps S3301 to S3312.

Further, when the generated flag is set in step S3525 and the third specific effect has been generated, the process proceeds to step S3521 to execute the process for generating the non-third specific effect.

As described above, by making the number of ending games variable instead of the fixed number of 7 games, the game in which the third specific effect is generated in the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied is the first game in the AT set. It is not limited to , but is random. By doing so, it becomes more difficult to grasp whether or not the AT set is continued from the update timing of the pseudo set, and it is possible to enhance the effect of entertaining the pseudo set presentation.

Moreover, in the above configuration, since the setting value can be estimated based on the number of ending games, when the ending effect is performed, not only does the AT mode end, but also the setting value can be predicted. It is also possible to provide the fun of playing, and it is possible to suitably compensate for the decline in the player's desire to play.

In this case, the set values can be estimated and narrowed down based not only on the number of ending games, but also on the continuation rate of the AT mode. The importance of predicting and grasping the rate is increased, and it becomes possible to make the player pay more attention to the occurrence of the third specific effect.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the occurrence probability of the third specific effect is changed. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a third specific effect table in this modified example.

The third specific effect table in this modified example is set so that the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the less likely the third specific effect will occur, and the lower the continuation rate, the more likely the third specific effect will occur. Specifically, considering the lottery results of each game, in the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, there is a probability of about 71.5% per game, and 90% In AT mode with a continuation rate of 1.5% per game. Under conditions where the continuation conditions are met, the pseudo-set lasts for a maximum of 10 games, while the AT mode with 10% continuation lasts about 1.4 games, and the AT mode with 90% continuation lasts about 9.3 games. The lower the AT mode continuation rate, the fewer the number of games per pseudo set.

In addition, as already described, in the present embodiment, a pseudo-set effect is performed with 10 games as one set. is updated to That is, the probability of updating the pseudo set increases as the third specific effect is more likely to occur.

The average number of continuous sets in AT mode is about 2.1 sets in 10% continuous AT mode, about 7.9 sets in 90% continuous AT mode, and 90% continuous AT mode. The mode lasts 3.7 times as many sets as the 10% duration AT mode. On the other hand, in the pseudo set, the update probability of the pseudo set is higher in the 10% continuous AT mode as described above, and the average number of pseudo sets in the 10% continuous AT mode is lasts about 4.4 sets, and about 6.8 sets in the 90% duration AT mode. Therefore, in the AT mode with 90% continuation, 1.5 times as many pseudo sets as in the AT mode with 10% continuation will continue, and the continuation rate in the number of pseudo sets is greater than the difference in the continuation rate in the actual number of AT mode sets. difference is smaller.

Also, in the 60% continuous AT mode, about 3.5 sets are continued, so the 60% continuous AT mode has a smaller average continuous number of sets than the 90% continuous AT mode. However, the average value of the pseudo set is about 9.0 sets in the 60% continuous AT mode, and about 6.8 sets in the 90% continuous AT mode. The number of pseudo-sets is larger than in AT mode with 90% continuation. That is, the average number of AT sets and the average number of pseudo sets are reversed according to the continuation rate, and the lower the continuation rate, the larger the average number of pseudo sets.

The relationship between the AT mode continuation rate and the pseudo set update probability will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82(a) shows an example of a pseudo-set effect in the 10% continuous AT mode, and FIG. 82(b) shows an example of a pseudo-set effect in the 90% continuous AT mode. there is

For example, in the 10% continuation AT mode, the first set starts at te1, and the pseudo set effect starts from te2 when the opening effect ends. In this case, although the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set of the AT mode started at te1 and the second set of the AT mode started at te5, the 3rd set of the AT mode started at te11 is satisfied. It is assumed that the continuation condition is not established in the set, and the AT mode ends at te13 through the ending effect that starts at te12.

As described above, in the 10% continuation AT mode, if the continuation condition is satisfied, the third specific effect will occur with a probability of about 71.5% in each game. After the first set of pseudo-set effects is started, the third specific effect occurs at te3 to te11, and after 10 sets of pseudo-sets are performed, the ending effect is generated.

On the other hand, in the 90% continuation AT mode, the first set starts at tf1, and the pseudo set effect starts at tf2 when the opening effect ends. In this case, the first set of AT mode started at tf1, the second set of AT mode started at tf4, the third set of AT mode started at tf7, and the third set started at tf11. Although the continuation condition is satisfied in the 4th set of AT mode, the continuation condition is not satisfied in the 5th set of AT mode started at tf14. , the AT mode ends.

As mentioned above, in the 90% continuation AT mode, if the continuation conditions are satisfied, the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied is lower than the 10% continuation AT mode, with a probability of about 1.5% in each game. In the figure, after the first set of pseudo set effects is started from tf2, the third specific effects are generated at tf3, tf5, tf6, tf8 to tf10, and tf12 to tf14, resulting in 10 sets. It shows that the ending effect occurred after the pseudo-set of.

That is, in this case, the actual number of sets in the AT mode with 10% continuation is 3 sets, and the actual number of sets in the AT mode with 90% continuation is 5 sets. The number of pseudo-sets is 10 sets, and the number of pseudo-sets in the AT mode with 90% continuation is also 10 sets. can be given to people.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, when a specific effect occurs in the pseudo-set effect in the second embodiment, the jackpot effect is executed over a predetermined number of games (4 games to 14 games). A pseudo-set production is performed. Then, when the specific effect does not occur in the pseudo set effect, the AT mode ends when the prescribed number of games (10 games) of the pseudo set effect is completed. In addition, in order to distinguish the specific effect in this embodiment from the specific effects in the other embodiments, the specific effect in this embodiment is also referred to as a fourth specific effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 83(a), in the embodiment, when the AT mode is started, a simulated effect is generated from the start of the AT mode without going through the opening effect as in the second embodiment. A set production is started.

The pseudo set effect continues for a maximum of 10 games, as in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83(b1), in the same manner as in the second embodiment, a fourth specific effect and each variable area in which characters with the same number are aligned and stopped in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 using a symbol variable effect An effect is produced in which any one of the non-fourth specific effects where the characters of the same number are not aligned in SP1 to SP3 and stop is generated.

As shown in FIG. 83(b2), the fourth specific effect is generated before the final game when the number-of-remaining-games image GP becomes 1, and as shown in FIG. 83(b3), a big win effect is performed. As the jackpot effect, for example, a effect is set in which a state in which a friend character's eyes are closed is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the effect continues over a minimum of 4 games and a maximum of 14 games. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(b4), in the final game of the jackpot effect, when a transition effect is performed in which the ally characters open their eyes wide, the pseudo-set effect is started again from the next game. be done.

In the pseudo set effect, when the non-fourth specific effect is performed over ten games, as shown in FIG. As shown in b6), the non-renewal effect is performed and the AT mode ends.

<AT effect setting processing>
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in this embodiment.

After subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter in step S3601, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received in step S3602. If a continuation command has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step S3603. If a negative determination is made in step S3602, or if the process of step S3603 has been executed, the process advances to step S3604.

In step S3604, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and the game to be started this time is the first game in the AT mode set. If it is the first game of the AT set, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set in step S3605. This AT effect setting process is ended. The adjustment process is a process for adjusting the number of games of the pseudo-set effect and the jackpot effect being executed at the start of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not established, and the details thereof will be described later.

If it is not the first game of the set in step S3604, or if the sub-side continuation flag is set even if it is the first game of the AT set in step S3605, the process proceeds to step S3607. In step S3607, it is determined whether or not an adjusted flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The adjusted flag is a flag that is set when the adjustment processing in step S3606 is performed.

If the adjusted flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3608, and it is determined whether or not the big hit effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The big win effect flag is a flag that is set when starting the big win effect, and is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the big win effect is in progress. When the jackpot effect flag is not set and the virtual set effect is performed instead of the jackpot effect, the AT effect setting process is terminated after executing the fourth specific effect setting process in step S3609.

<Fourth specific effect setting process>
In the fourth specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 85, a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo AT counter is executed in step S3701, and a process of updating the remaining number of games image GP is executed in step S3702. Then, in step S3703, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, in step S3704, the pseudo AT counter is 0, and the game to be started this time is a pseudo set. It is determined whether or not it is the 10th game. If it is not the 10th game of the pseudo set, in steps S3705 to S3708, a process of determining whether or not to generate the fourth specific effect is executed according to the lottery result of the current game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. do. The processes of steps S3701 to S3708 are the same as the processes of steps S3301 to S3308, and the third specific effect table of FIG. 75 can be used as the fourth specific effect table.

In step S3709, it is determined whether or not the fourth specific effect lottery performed in step S3708 is won. If the fourth specific effect lottery is won, or if it is determined in step S3604 that it is the final game of the pseudo set, then in step S3710 the fourth specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. 83 (b2)). Then, in step S3711, the number-of-big-hit-effect game setting process is executed, and then the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated.

<Processing for setting the number of jackpot production games>
In the jackpot effect game number setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 86, in step S3801, a process of acquiring a jackpot game number table from the various table storage area 182a is executed. As shown in FIG. 88, the jackpot game number table is set so that one of 4 games to 14 games is selected according to the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. It is set such that the higher the set value of the payout rate, the easier it is to select the short game number jackpot effect.

After acquiring the number-of-big-hit-games table in step S3801, the number of games for performing the big-hit effect is determined by lottery in step S3802. Then, in step S3803, the lottery result is input to the jackpot effect counter 1 provided in the various counter areas 183b. , the process for setting the number of jackpot effect games ends. By setting the jackpot effect flag, the affirmative determination is made in step S3608 from the next game.

In the fourth specific effect setting process, when it is determined that the fourth specific effect lottery is not won in step S3709, the process proceeds to step S3712 so that the non-fourth specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. is set ((b1) in FIG. 83). Then, in step S3713, it is determined whether or not the pseudo AT counter is 0, and the game to be started this time is the tenth game of the pseudo set. Processing for setting so that the effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 83(b6)). If it is not the 10th game of the pseudo set, the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated.

In the AT effect setting process, when it is determined that the jackpot effect flag is set in step S3608, the process proceeds to step S3610. In step S3610, a process of subtracting 1 from the jackpot effect counter is executed. Then, in step S3611, a process of adding 1 to the jackpot production counter 2 provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The jackpot effect counter 2 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games in which the jackpot effect is executed. In the subsequent step S3612, it is determined whether or not the big hit effect counter 1 has become zero. If it is not 0, in step S3613, after performing the process of setting so that the jackpot effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 (FIG. 83 (b3)), the main AT effect setting process exit.

On the other hand, in step S3612, the jackpot effect counter 1 becomes 0, and if it is the final game of the jackpot effect, the process advances to step S3614 to execute processing for clearing the jackpot effect flag, and in step S3615, the jackpot effect counter 2 is executed. is cleared to 0. Then, in step S3616, a process of inputting 10 to the pseudo AT counter is executed, and in step S3617, a process of setting the transition effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 83 ( b4)), this AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Processing for adjustment>
Next, the adjustment processing of step S3606, which is performed in the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3901, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect counter 1 is greater than 0 and the game is scheduled to perform a jackpot effect. If the jackpot effect counter 1 is 0 and the pseudo set effect is to be performed, in step S3902, a process for setting the fourth specific effect to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (Fig. 83(b2)). Then, in step S3903, the big hit effect flag is set, and in step S3904, after executing the process of setting 7 to the big win effect counter 1, this adjustment process ends. The processing of steps S3902 to S3904 corresponds to the processing of steps S3710, S3803 and S3804. That is, by performing the processing of steps S3902 to S3904, the fourth specific effect is generated in the game to be started this time, and the jackpot effect for 7 games is performed from the next game. In this case, the game in which the transition effect is performed after the jackpot effect ends is the 8th game in the final set of the AT mode, and the pseudo set effect by the non-fourth specific effect is performed from the 9th game to the 18th game. (See FIG. 89(a)).

More specifically, from the 2nd game of the final set, which is the next game, to the 8th game of the final set, by determining that the jackpot effect flag is set in step S3608 in the AT effect setting process, A process for setting the transition effect is performed. In the ninth and subsequent games of the final set, since the jackpot effect flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S3608, and the fourth specific effect setting process is performed. In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined in step S3703 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, and the process proceeds to step S3715. Then, in step S3715, it is determined whether or not the adjusted flag is set, and since it is not set, the process proceeds to step S3712, and processing for performing the non-fourth specific effect is executed.

If the jackpot effect counter 1 is greater than 0 in step S3901 and the game is scheduled to perform a jackpot effect, it is determined in step S3905 whether or not the jackpot effect counter 2 is 7 or more. When the jackpot effect counter 2 is less than 7 and the number of games of the jackpot effect already executed is 6 games or less, 1 is input to the jackpot effect counter 2 in step S3906, and the jackpot effect counter is entered in step S3907. Execute the process of inputting 8 to 1. Then, in step S3908, after the process of setting the big win effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 (FIG. 83(b3)), the adjustment process is terminated. In other words, by executing the processing of steps S3906 to S3908, the jackpot effect is executed over eight games from the game started this time. As described above, the case where the processing of these steps S3906 to S3908 is executed is when the jackpot effect is scheduled to be performed in the current game, and when it is six games or less after the start of the jackpot effect. Yes, by performing the processing of steps S3906 and S3908, the jackpot effects are executed over a total of 8 games to 14 games. In this case, the game in which the transition effect is performed after the jackpot effect ends is the 8th game in the final set of the AT mode, and the pseudo set effect by the non-fourth specific effect is performed from the 9th game to the 18th game. (See FIG. 89(b)).

More specifically, similarly to the case where the process of step S3904 is performed, from the second game of the final set which is the next game to the eighth game of the final set, the jackpot effect flag is set in step S3608 in the AT effect setting process. A process for setting a big hit effect or a transition effect is performed by determining that it has been performed. In the ninth and subsequent games of the final set, since the jackpot effect flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step S3608, and the fourth specific effect setting process is performed. In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined that the sub-side continuation flag is not set in step S3703, and since the adjusted flag is not set in step S3715, the process proceeds to step S3712, and the non-fourth specific effect is performed. The process to do is executed.

If the jackpot effect counter 2 is 7 or more in step S3005, the process proceeds to step S3909, and the jackpot effect currently being executed is performed so that the final set of the pseudo set effect is performed from the ninth game of the final set of the AT mode. After once ending, the game (the number of games in which the pseudo-set presentation is continued) in which the fourth specific presentation is generated in the pseudo-set presentation after the relevant jackpot presentation, and the number of games in which the jackpot presentation is continued after the pseudo-set presentation are decided. Execute the processing to be performed.

That is, in step S3909, first, a process of clearing the big hit effect counter 1 and the big hit effect counter 2 to 0 is executed. Then, in step S3910, a process of setting the transition effect to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 83(b4)), and a process of clearing the jackpot effect flag is performed in step S3911. .

In the subsequent step S3912, a process of acquiring the adjustment game number table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in a step S3913, an adjustment game number lottery process is executed.

The adjustment game number table is a table for determining the number of games to be continued for the next big win effect after the currently executed big win effect, and as shown in FIG. ing. In step S3913, the number of games from 4 to 7 is randomly determined by lottery or the like.

After executing the processing of step S3913, the processing of inputting the processing result of step S3913 to the adjusted counter 2 provided in the various counter area 183b is executed in step S3914. The adjusted counter 2 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games of the big win effect next to the currently executed big win effect.

In the subsequent step S3915, a calculation process of the number of games for which the fourth specific effect is generated for adjustment is executed. This process is a process of calculating the game (the number of games in which the pseudo set effect is continued) in which the fourth specific effect is generated in the currently executed pseudo set effect after the big win effect. Specifically, a process of subtracting the adjusted counter 2 from 7 is executed.

Then, in step S3916, the process of inputting the processing result of step S3915 to the adjusted counter 1 provided in the various counter area 183b is executed. The adjusted counter 1 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of continuation games of the pseudo set effect next to the jackpot effect currently being executed. After executing the processing of step S3916, the processing for setting the adjusted flag is executed in step S3917, and then this processing for adjustment ends.

In the AT effect setting process, if the adjusted flag is set in step S3607 and the adjustment process has been executed before the previous game, the process proceeds to step S3618. In step S3618, it is determined whether adjusted counter 1 is greater than zero. As described above, the adjusted counter 1 corresponds to the number of remaining games in the adjusted pseudo-set effect, and when the adjusted counter 1 is greater than 0, the game to be started this time is the above adjusted It means that it is a game that should perform a pseudo-set effect of. In this case, the process advances to step S3609 to execute the fourth specific effect setting process.

In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined in step S3703 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, and the process proceeds to step S3715. Then, in step S3715, it is determined whether or not the adjusted flag is set. In this case, since the adjusted flag is set, the process advances to step S3716 to execute the process of subtracting 1 from the adjusted counter 1 . Then, in step S3717, it is determined whether or not the adjusted counter 1 has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the process proceeds to step S3712 to perform processing for generating the non-fourth specific effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3717 that the adjusted counter 1 has become 0, then in step S3718 processing is performed to set the fourth specific effect to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. After that, the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated. In this case, since the number of continuous games for the next big win effect has already been set (adjusted counter 2, step S3914), the process for setting the number of continuous games for the next big win effect (step S3711) is not executed.

In the AT effect setting process, if the adjusted flag is set in step S3607 and the adjusted counter 1 is 0 in step S3618, as described above, the adjusted pseudo set effect has already been executed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3619 to perform a process of subtracting 1 from the adjusted counter 2 in order to perform an adjusted jackpot effect. Then, in step S3620, it is determined whether or not the adjusted counter 2 has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the process proceeds to step S3613, and a jackpot effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. After performing the setting process, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3620 that the adjusted counter 2 has become 0, the process of clearing the adjusted flag is executed in step S3621, and then the process advances to step S3616 to set the pseudo AT counter to 11. After performing the input process and the process of setting so that the transition effect in step S3617 is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

In this case, in the first game in the final set of the AT mode, the jackpot effect ends and the transition effect occurs, and from the second game onwards, the simulated set is adjusted over the number of games corresponding to the value of the adjusted counter 1. A performance is held. Then, after the fourth specific effect is generated in the adjusted pseudo-set effect, the adjusted jackpot effect is performed over the number of games corresponding to the value of the adjusted counter 2. - 特許庁Since the adjusted jackpot effect is adjusted to end in the 8th game of the final set, a pseudo-set effect in which the non-fourth specific effect is repeatedly generated is performed from the 9th game to the 18th game. AT mode ends (see FIG. 89(c)).

Thus, in this embodiment, when the fourth specific effect occurs in the pseudo-set effect, the next pseudo-set is not started immediately, but the next pseudo-set is started via the jackpot effect. Therefore, even if the fourth specific effect occurs early in the pseudo set and the number of corresponding games is small, the number of games can be compensated for by the game in which the big win effect is performed. , and it is possible to genuinely increase the expectation that the pseudo set will be updated.

Since the jackpot performance can be performed over 4 to 14 games, after the fourth specific performance occurs during the pseudo set, the jackpot performance ends in a short number of games and the next pseudo set starts. In some cases, after the jackpot effect is performed for a long period of time (with a long number of games), the next pseudo-set may be started, and only at the timing of the occurrence of the fourth specific effect during the pseudo-set effect Instead, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the generation timing of the transition effect (end timing of the big win effect) in the big win effect, so that the player can enjoy the thrilling game.

Here, the pseudo-set effect (maximum 10 games) performed during the AT mode and the continuous jackpot effect (4 games to 14 games) are the number of games of 18 games or more in the AT set when the number of games of both effects is combined. It is set so that there are cases where the number of games is less than 18 games. By doing so, even if the number of games of the AT set is not lengthened or shortened on the side of the main control device 101, the impression as if the number of games of the AT set changes depending on the length of both effects. can be given. By doing so, it is possible to improve the playability of the AT set with a relatively simple configuration.

In this case, the pseudo set effect and the jackpot effect are set so that the number of games is less than the number of games of the AT set even if they are continued to the maximum, so both effects are associated with the AT set as a set. It is possible to strongly give the impression that the game is being played, and both effects can help give the impression that the number of games in the AT set changes.

Further, as in the above configuration, when the fourth specific effect occurs in the pseudo set effect, the transition to the jackpot effect occurs, and when the pseudo set effect ends without the fourth specific effect occurring, the AT mode is switched. By adopting a configuration in which the game ends as it is, the non-occurrence of the fourth specific effect in the pseudo-set effect and the end of the AT mode are more closely related, and the generation of the fourth specific effect can be more eagerly awaited. It becomes possible.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) The AT mode is a set management type AT mode, and the number of continuous AT mode games is different according to the continuation rate, but there are multiple AT modes with different ease of continuing the AT mode (number of continuous games) may be provided. In this case, for example, a plurality of AT modes with different initial numbers of games may be set, or a plurality of AT modes with different winning probabilities of the final lottery may be set, with the AT mode continuing until the final lottery is won. may be set, and the AT mode is terminated when a predetermined end result (for example, a predetermined bonus result, etc.) is won, and a plurality of AT modes with different winning probabilities for the predetermined end result may be set, a plurality of AT modes with different winning probabilities for adding the number of games may be set, and a plurality of AT modes may be set for different numbers of games to be added at the time of winning with the addition of the number of games. , may be combined. Then, the probability of winning the specific effect lottery, the probability of winning the suggesting effect lottery, the number of ending games, the number of games of the jackpot effect, etc. may be changed depending on which AT mode is selected.

(2) The set management type AT mode has 18 games as one set, but the number of games in one set is not limited to this, and may be more or less than 18 games. Alternatively, the number of games in one set may change (there may be more than 18 games), such as by adding more games in one set. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the continuation condition is always satisfied in the first set as in the second embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the number of games to be continued in the first set is doubled. (36 games), and not only the first set, but also when updating an AT set that satisfies the continuation condition, double the number of games as the number of games in the set. Alternatively, the number of games corresponding to the value of the AT set counter (if the AT set counter is 3, the number of games is tripled, etc.) may be set as the number of games of the set.

(3) The lottery table used in the lottery process of each game is common in AT modes with different continuation rates, but the lottery table may be different in each AT mode. Therefore, the winning probabilities of part or all of the predetermined combination or the specific combination or other results may be different, and the occurrence probability of the specific effect may be different in each AT mode due to the different winning probabilities. In this case, the odds of winning a part or all of a predetermined combination or a specific combination or other results may be different in each AT mode to such an extent that the player cannot identify them (composition where the probabilities are substantially the same).

(4) In the AT add-on process, while it is possible to win an add-on win in a specific role, it is configured not to win an add-on win in a normal role. In this case, it is preferable to make the probability of winning additional winnings in the normal combination lower than the probability of winning additional winnings in the specific combination. In addition, it is excluded that the probability of winning additional winnings in some roles of normal roles (for example, normal reply C) is higher than the probability of winning in some roles of specific roles (e.g., Chance A). However, as a whole, it is sufficient if it is easier to win the special combination than the normal combination.

(5) The probability of winning the specific effect lottery is set to be higher for the specific role than for the normal role, but the probability of winning the specific effect lottery for the specific role and the normal role is the same or almost the same. May be set. Even in this case, since it is easier to win a normal role than a specific role in the lottery process of each game, the specific effect is generated with the normal role as a trigger rather than the ratio of the specific performance with the specific role as a trigger. the ratio will be greater. In addition, the probability of winning the specific effect lottery may be higher for the normal role than for the specific role. It is preferable to adjust the winning probability in the lottery processing of each game for the normal combination and the specific combination and the winning probability in the specific effect lottery so that the rate of occurrence of is greater.

(6) The continuation of the AT set in the AT mode is regarded as an advantageous event to generate an advantageous event advantageous to the player, and the continuation lottery is an example of the advantageous determination, and the conditions for continuing the AT set are established. Although a specific performance is performed as a performance corresponding to a good thing, it may be a performance associated with an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, for example, winning a lottery for transition to the AT mode. , may be a production associated with winning the execution lottery of the suggestion production that suggests the set value, or it may be a production associated with winning the AT mode extra lottery It is good also as the production|presentation associated.

In this case, if a specific effect is to be performed as an effect associated with winning the AT mode transition lottery, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT mode transition lottery is won via the omen mode. In a constitution in which a winning performance is performed, a specific performance can occur during the sign mode and before the winning performance is performed or before the AT mode is started. After providing a plurality of modes with different winning probabilities of the shift lottery, the probability of occurrence of the specific performance is changed according to each mode, or the execution lottery of the specific performance is performed using the lottery result of each game. It is good to

In addition, if a specific performance is performed as a performance associated with winning the execution lottery of the suggestion performance that suggests the set value, after winning the execution lottery of the suggestion performance, until the suggestion performance is performed After having a configuration that requires multiple games for the execution of the suggested effect, a specific effect can occur in the game from winning the lottery for the suggested effect until the suggested effect is performed, and the suggested effect of the set value A plurality of modes with different winning probabilities of the execution lottery are provided, and the probability of occurrence of the specific performance is changed according to each mode, or the execution lottery of the specific performance is performed using the lottery result of each game. It is good to

Then, if a specific effect is performed as an effect associated with winning the additional lottery in the AT mode, it is configured such that a plurality of games are required from winning the additional lottery to performing the additional lottery. After that, a specific effect can occur in the game from winning the additional lottery until the additional lottery is performed, and after providing a plurality of modes with different winning probabilities of the additional lottery, each mode is set. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the probability of occurrence of the specific effect is made different, or a configuration in which the execution lottery for the specific effect is performed using the lottery result of each game.

In these cases, the trigger for the advantageous judgment to cause the advantageous event may be set according to each advantageous event, and if the AT mode transition is to be the advantageous event, the AT mode transition lottery is executed. As a trigger, for example, winning of a specific combination or completion of a predetermined number of games may be used as a predetermined determination trigger.

(7) Although the specific effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, it may be configured to be performed by another display section, lamp, etc., or may be performed by using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. good too. When using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, for example, in a game in which the specific effect is not performed, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are normally started to rotate, while in a game in which the specific effect is performed, the reels 32L are rotated. , 32M, and 32R are rotated in a manner different from the normal rotation start manner (for example, the period until the start of rotation is made longer or shorter than usual, the rotation is started sequentially from the left reel 32L, or the reel is rotated at a constant speed. The rotation may be started in such a manner that it rotates at a low speed or temporarily stops in a state in which a predetermined symbol combination is formed until reaching the point. It should be noted that it is not limited to the start of rotation, and in the game, the rotation mode from the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to the end of rotation is set to a specific mode different from the normal mode, thereby creating a specific effect. It should be configured to perform.

(8) When the specific effect lottery is won, the specific effect is performed in the game in which the game is won. may be configured to perform In this case, it may be determined by lottery or the like in which game the specific effect is to be performed, or the specific effect may be performed after a predetermined number of games. However, the game in which the specific effect is performed must be a game in which the specific effect can be executed (during the confrontation effect or the pseudo set of the set). It is preferable to set a configuration in which a game for executing a specific effect is determined from.

(9) Although it is configured to perform a specific effect lottery to perform a specific effect according to the lottery result of each game, for example, at the start of the confrontation effect or the start of the pseudo set effect, the execution lottery of the specific effect and the number of games to be executed A lottery may be performed. In this case, the lottery may be performed regardless of the lottery result of the game in which these lotteries are performed. (the winning probability of the execution lottery and the number of games to be executed differ according to the lottery result).

(10) When the specific effect lottery during the confrontation effect is won, only the game in which the specific effect lottery is won is given the specific effect, but the specific effect may be performed after the winning game. may be configured to be performed over a plurality of games.

(11) In the set management type AT mode, the continuation rate is set when shifting to the AT mode, and the continuation rate does not change during the AT mode, but the continuation rate may change even during the AT mode. may be configured. For example, a lottery to change the continuation rate is performed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity such as when each game or set is updated, and if the change lottery is won, the continuation rate will change (for example, the continuation rate from 10% to 60%). % continuation rate). When the continuation rate changes, the continuation rate may be changed not only in a mode in which the continuation rate increases but also in a mode in which the continuation rate decreases. Alternatively, the lottery may be drawn at separate lottery opportunities.

Furthermore, the pattern of continuing at 90% in the first set, continuing at 10% in the second set, and continuing at 60% from the third set onwards, or continuing at 10% in the first set and continuing at 60% in the second set. Scenario management to determine which pattern to use when shifting to AT mode by setting multiple patterns with a predetermined continuation rate for each set, such as a pattern that continues at 100% and continues at 90% for the third and subsequent sets. It may be set to the AT mode of the type.

In these configurations, it is preferable that the continuation rate of the current set affects the continuation rate of the next and subsequent sets. , a configuration that determines the next continuation rate by referring to the current continuation rate (for example, if this time is 10%, 90% is more likely to be selected next time than 10%, and if this time is 60%, the next time 60% is more likely to be selected than other continuation rates), and with the above scenario management type configuration, it is possible to narrow down the continuation rate of the next and subsequent sets from the continuation rate of this set. By doing so, the significance of predicting and grasping the continuation rate (of this set) based on the specific effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is ensured.

(12) In a configuration where the continuation rate can change in each set, instead of generating a specific effect corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition of the current set according to the continuation rate of the current set, or In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition of the current set is generated according to the continuation rate of the next and subsequent sets.

(13) Even during the opening effect, battle effect, jackpot effect, and ending effect, various specific effects may occur on condition that the AT set continuation condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that the confrontation effect is more likely to cause the specific effect than the battle effect, or the pseudo-set effect is more likely to cause the specific effect than the opening effect, the jackpot effect, or the ending effect. .

(14) Although the rate of occurrence of the specific effect is varied according to the continuation rate of the AT mode, the aspect of the specific effect (color and shape of the character to be displayed, display timing, etc.) may be different. can be performed over a plurality of games, the number of games in which the specific effect is executed may differ according to the continuation rate of the AT mode.

(15) Depending on the rate of continuation of the AT mode, the lottery table used for the lottery process of each game may be changed so that the winning probability of the predetermined result differs. In this case, by setting the predetermined result as a trigger for generating the specific effect, it is possible to change the occurrence rate of the specific effect according to the continuation rate of the AT mode. In addition, the number of expected medal increases (net increase) that can be expected per game may differ according to the continuation rate of the AT mode, such as by setting the pressing order bell as a predetermined result. For example, the continuation rate is high. The expected medal increase number may increase as the continuation rate increases, or the expected medal increase number may decrease as the continuation rate increases. It should be noted that the configuration of varying the expected medal increase number according to the continuation rate of the AT mode is not limited to the configuration of varying the lottery table. It may be implemented in a different manner, or a configuration in which the mode of notification of the pressing order at the time of winning such as a pressing order bell is different (the mode of notifying the pressing order of two options, the mode of notifying the pressing order of one option, etc.) (The winning probabilities of the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination differ depending on the mode of notification of the pressing order), or other configurations may be employed.

(16) In a configuration in which a specific effect is generated when a set addition lottery is not won in an AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the set addition lottery triggered by a specific role is not won. It is not limited to the mode in which a specific effect is generated in the case of a normal role, and it may be configured to generate a specific effect in the event that a set addition lottery triggered by a normal role is not won. A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is generated in a part of cases where the set addition lottery is not won. In these, it is preferable that the specific effect triggered by the specific role is more likely to occur than the specific effect triggered by the normal role.

(17) A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is performed when winning a set addition in an AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied. In this case, it may be configured to perform a specific effect in part when winning the set addition, or the probability of performing the specific effect may differ depending on the lottery result that triggered the set addition, more specifically, A lottery result with a lower winning probability may be configured to make it easier to perform a specific performance when adding a set, or a configuration may be configured to make it harder to perform a specific performance when adding a set to a lottery result with a lower winning probability.

(18) If an additional lottery is won during an AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied and the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific effect lottery may not be performed in the game. Further, in the game, the specific effect lottery may not be performed, and the specific effect may be generated after the predetermined game through the specific effect lottery or without the specific effect lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is generated.

(19) In the suggestive effect table, the suggestive effect is set so that the suggestive effect can be performed when the result is a failure, but the suggestive effect may be generated even in other normal roles or special roles.

(20) When a specific effect occurs, it may be configured to be in a state in which a suggestive effect can be performed with a predetermined probability, and the probability of being in a state in which a suggestive effect can be performed may differ depending on the set value. Alternatively, it may be configured differently depending on the continuation rate. In addition, in a configuration in which a specific effect can occur multiple times during a confrontation effect, the probability of occurrence of the suggestive effect and the transition rate of the state in which the suggestive effect can be performed may differ according to the number of times the specific effect occurs. Alternatively, the higher the number of occurrences of the specific effect, the higher the probability of occurrence of the suggestive effect, or the higher the transition rate to the state in which the suggestive effect can be performed.

(21) In a configuration that performs a pseudo-set effect, if the corresponding specific effect does not occur during the pseudo-set, the pseudo-set effect is terminated and the ending effect is performed until the AT mode ends. However, the effect may not be performed until the game in which the AT mode ends, or the number of remaining games of the pseudo set effect may be extended until the AT mode ends.

(22) On the premise that the ending effect is performed after the pseudo set effect, for example, a specific effect is generated in the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, and the pseudo set effect is updated. , If the ending effect is not performed, the number of remaining games of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied is the number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect (10 games) + 1 (11 games remaining). It is preferable to generate an effect and update the pseudo-set effect.

(23) Although the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set production is set to 10 games, the number may be less than the number of continuous games in the AT set (18), and may be 11 games or more, or 9 games or less. There may be. Conversely, the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect may be equal to or greater than the number of continuous games (18) of the AT set, 18 games, or 19 games or more. Each pseudo-set may have a different maximum number of continuous games, and in a configuration where each pseudo-set has a different maximum number of continuous games, the maximum number of continuous games may be determined by lottery or the like when the pseudo-set is updated. In this case, when the pseudo set is updated with an AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the remaining number of games of the AT set should be set to the maximum number of continuous games of the updated pseudo set.

In addition, the number of continuous AT set games is set to be an integer multiple of the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set production, and the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set production is set to be an integer multiple of the maximum number of continuous games of the AT set. The number of both continuous games may be set. For example, if the number of continuous games of the AT set is 18 games, the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set production may be 9 games or 6 games, or the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set production may be 36 games or 54 games. good.

(24) In the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, and in the game in which the number of remaining AT mode games is 18, a specific effect is forcibly performed in the pseudo set effect. The game in which the specific effect is forcibly performed (without passing through the specific effect lottery) is not limited to the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. For example, in a configuration in which success or failure of the continuation condition of the next AT set is determined at the end of the AT set (final game), if the continuation condition of the next AT set is not satisfied in the final game of the AT set, A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is generated in the game to update the pseudo set. At least, the number of remaining AT mode games is a predetermined number that is equal to or less than twice the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set (20 games) and equal to or greater than the maximum number of continuous games plus 1 (11 games). By forcibly causing a specific effect to occur in the game that is played, it is possible to execute the pseudo-set next to the pseudo-set that ended with the specific effect over the maximum number of continuous games, After the next pseudo set has been played for the maximum number of continuous games, the next pseudo set cannot be played for the maximum number of continuous games. In addition, in the case where a specific effect is forcibly performed according to the number of remaining games in AT mode as described above, a game in which the specific effect can be forcibly performed (for example, the final game of the pseudo set as described above) Then, it is possible to successfully camouflage the specific effect by making the specific effect more likely to occur than in other games.

(25) A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is forcibly generated during the pseudo set effect in relation to the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section. For example, when the number of games to reach the upper limit number of games of 1500 games reaches a predetermined number, a specific effect is forcibly generated during the pseudo set effect, so that the AT mode is an advantageous section. Even if the game is terminated under forced termination conditions, it is possible to match the termination game with the termination game of the pseudo-set presentation. It should be noted that the predetermined number is preferably the number of games equal to or greater than the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set effect plus 1, and more preferably the number of games is equal to or less than twice the maximum number of continuous games. In addition, in a configuration in which the ending effect is performed before reaching the upper limit number of games of 1500 games, the number of games up to the number of games (1450 games) excluding the number of games in which the ending effect is performed (for example, 50 games) is the above number. It is preferable to have a configuration in which a compulsory specific effect is generated when a predetermined number is reached.

(26) After the specific effect is performed during the confrontation effect, an effect suggesting the value of the AT set counter on the main controller 101 side (the number of remaining AT sets) is performed, or before the execution of the specific effect It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the suggested effect is easily performed.

(27) When the continuation condition is met during the battle presentation, the battle presentation table is rewritten. is provided, and if the continuation condition is satisfied during the battle production, the production is performed with the battle production table as the ally defeat production, and the revival victory production is performed after the ally defeat production. good too.

(28) The confrontation effect is 10 games and the battle effect is 8 games, and the number of games in which the confrontation effect is performed is larger than the number of games in which the battle effect is performed in one AT set. The confrontation effect may be 9 games and the battle effect may be 9 games, or the confrontation effect may be 8 games or less and the battle effect may be 10 games or more.

(29) Even if the specific effect occurs during the confrontation effect, the battle effect is performed, but if the specific effect occurs during the confrontation effect, the battle effect is not performed and the jackpot effect is performed (Fig. 64(b)). may be played until the end game of the AT set.

(30) Although the confrontation effect and the battle effect are continuously performed, the confrontation effect and the battle effect may be interposed by a game in which a predetermined effect such as the above-described jackpot effect is interposed.

(31) The expected increase in number of medals per game during the AT mode is not limited to the above, and may be larger or smaller. In addition, the configuration may be such that the expected number of increased medals can be changed during the AT mode. If the JAC win can be established, the expected increase in the number of medals per game will increase over a predetermined number of games thereafter, and if the JAC win cannot be established at the time of winning the JAC, the expected increase in the number of medals will be increased. may be configured so as not to change. For example, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order at the time of winning the JAC, the JAC prize is not established, and when the operation order is different from the predetermined order, the JAC prize is established. It is possible to change the expected increase in number of medals during the AT mode depending on whether or not to execute the pressing order notification.

(32) Although the continuation rate of the AT set is suggested by the occurrence rate of the specific effect, etc., it may be separately configured to perform an effect that suggests the continuation rate. For example, a plurality of background colors are provided in the auxiliary display section 65 during the AT mode, and blue, for example, is likely to be selected as the background color in the AT mode of 10% continuation, while the background color is the background color in the AT mode of 90% continuation. For example, it may be configured such that red is likely to be selected.

(33) In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, the lottery for the advantageous zone transition is set to be won regardless of the lottery result, but the winning probability is not limited to the above.

(34) Various productions in AT mode (confrontation production, normal production, specific production, battle production, pattern variation production, second specific production, non-second specific production, standby production, opening production, pseudo-set production, third specific production Production, non-third specified production, ending production, renewal production, non-renewal production, resurrection production, jackpot production, transition production, etc.) are examples, and needless to say, the production mode is not limited to the above.

(35) The push order notification is configured to be performed by both the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side and the auxiliary display section 65 on the display control device 81 side. Well, for example, depending on the result of the lottery or the state, the display control device 81 side may be configured to execute without executing on the main control device 101 side.

(36) The instruction monitor 68 is configured to be capable of informing six different operation sequences. A configuration may be adopted in which only the stop switches 42 to 44 to be operated first are notified of the pressing order for the pressing order to which only the 42 to 44 are associated.

(37) Although the advantageous section ends when the AT mode ends, the advantageous section may not end when the AT mode ends. For example, the advantageous interval may not end according to the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval at the end of the AT mode. If the number multiplied by the expected increase per game is less than or equal to the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section, or if it is less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section may not be terminated. If the number obtained by multiplying the current advantageous section increase/decrease number MY with the above multiplied number is less than the upper limit increase number (2400) or less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section will not end. can be

(38) The lighting of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is controlled when transitioning to an advantageous section. A configuration may be adopted in which lighting control is performed when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied during the interval. The predetermined lighting condition may be established, for example, when a shift to the AT mode is confirmed, or when a situation arises in which notification of the pressing order may occur.

(39) A configuration may be adopted in which the press order notification is executed at least once during the CZ mode. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed at least once in the AT mode. , the AT mode or the CZ mode may not be terminated.

(40) Although the 1st BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 2-bet game, either one of the BBs may be used. A configuration may be adopted in which the second BB is won in the bet game, and none of the BBs is won in the 3-bet game.

(41) In the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won. It is good also as a structure which can be elected. In this case, the first BB winning and the second BB winning are established in the 2-bet game, the first BB and the second BB are not won in the 3-betting game, and the first BB and the second BB are winning in the 3-betting game. A configuration in which neither 2BB winning is established may be adopted. Note that the relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be reversed.

(42) The same lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, and the same game base is used.

(43) Both the first BB state and the second BB state are configured to play a 3-bet game. The number of bets may be different depending on the type of BB state, such as playing with the BB state. In this case, each game in the first BB state is a game with the number of bets different from the specified specified number, and each game in the second BB state is a game with the specified specified number of bets.

(44) The games in the first BB state and the second BB state are both configured to restrict the execution of instruction functions such as processing for notification of pressing order and specific processing. A configuration in which the presence or absence of restrictions differs depending on the type of BB state, such that the execution of processing related to these instruction functions is restricted while the execution of processing related to these instruction functions is permitted in the game in the second BB state. good. Further, a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state may be provided, and processing related to each instruction function may be restricted or not restricted in any or all of them.

(45) Although the 3-bet game does not allow the 2nd BB win and the 2-bet game does not allow the 1st BB win, the 3-bet game is more difficult to win the 2nd BB than the 2-bet game. A structure may be adopted, and a structure may be adopted in which it is more difficult to win the first BB in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game.

(46) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB is not won, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB is not won. The game may have a configuration in which it is more difficult to win the first BB than in the 3-bet game.

(47) An operation unit that can set one bet may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of bets can be varied according to the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, when the operation unit is operated once, a 1-bet is made, when it is operated twice, a 2-bet is made, and when it is operated 3 times, a 3-bet is made. Furthermore, if you operate 4 times, it will be 1 bet, and if you operate it 5 times, it will be 2 bets. A possible configuration is preferable.

(48) Although the upper limit of the number of games in the CZ mode is uniformly set to 10 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like. Also, although the upper limit of the number of games in the preparation mode is uniformly set to 40 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like.

(49) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is set to about plus 0.00, and the medals neither increase nor decrease in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state. A configuration in which the number of medals can be increased or a configuration in which the number of medals can be decreased may be used. In this case, it is sufficient that the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state is at least greater than the net increase number in the case of playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 3-bet game.

(50) Execution of each process related to the instruction function is allowed by the player playing the internal state or non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or establishing a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win. Although it is configured to shift from the state of being restricted to the state of being restricted, the gaming machine is configured to shift from the state of allowing the execution of each process related to the instruction function to the state of being restricted by, for example, completing a predetermined number of games. may be

(51) The ball payout rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 has the highest ball payout rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(52) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(53) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

(54) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for granting a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
Advantageous determination means (continuation determination processing and AT addition processing by the main controller 101) for executing an advantageous determination to cause an advantageous event (AT mode set continuation) that is advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity. functions to perform) and
If the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the advantageous execution means (AT processing for starting a new set in the mode processing, for example, a function of executing the processing of steps S1404 to S1406;
When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result and in the specific game executed in the situation before the specific timing, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, Execution determination means (function for executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining whether to execute the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result,
When the determination result by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to executing the specific notification, a specific notification means for executing the specific notification (a function of executing a specific effect setting process by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, an advantageous judgment is made to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player, and if the result of the advantageous judgment is an advantageous result, the advantageous event occurs at a predetermined specific timing. As a result, the game is diversified by adding a game that causes an advantageous event to the game, such as obtaining a privilege in each game.

In such a game, depending on the degree of advantage of the advantageous event, the player's interest is focused on the advantageous judgment that causes the advantageous event rather than the lottery result of each game or the awarding of benefits based on the lottery result. There is an undeniable possibility that the playability of the slot machine, in which the player's operation is involved in the start of the game and the granting of benefits, will be neglected. In particular, when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the game until an advantageous event occurs becomes a game waiting for an advantageous event, and the player's interest is likely to decrease.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a game as a specific game in a situation after the result of the advantageous determination that causes the advantageous event becomes an advantageous result and before the advantageous event occurs, according to the lottery result of the game Since the determination of execution of the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result is performed, the player's psychology, which wants to know that the advantageous result has been obtained before the advantageous event occurs, is used. The degree of attention to the lottery result is favorably increased.

Moreover, by adopting the above configuration, the lottery of each game can be performed in a game in which there is a time lag until an advantageous event occurs after the result of the advantageous judgment executed based on the predetermined judgment opportunity becomes an advantageous result. Since the specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event is performed according to the result, the specific notification is not performed as a result of the advantageous determination based on the predetermined determination result, but as if it were based on the lottery result of each game. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that a specific notification is being made. By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the specific game until an advantageous event occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature A2. A first state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) with different probabilities of the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means being the advantageous result are set. and
The probability that the determination result of the execution determination in the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the first state is the corresponding result, and the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the second state The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the determination result of the execution determination is different from the probability that the corresponding result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, in the first state and the second state in which the probability that the result of the advantageous judgment becomes an advantageous result is different, even if the lottery result by the same lottery means, the probability that the specific information will be executed in the specific game. is different. By doing so, not only the game property of grasping the result of the advantageous judgment by the specific notification, but also the game property of grasping the judgment state (first state or second state) of the advantageous judgment by the specific notification is added. By increasing the degree of attention to the notification, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the lottery result in the specific game.

Feature A3. The second state has a higher probability that the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means will be the advantageous result than the first state,
The specific when the advantageous result is obtained in the second state than the probability that the determination result of the execution determination in the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the first state is the corresponding result The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the determination result of the execution determination in a game has a higher probability of becoming the correspondence result.

According to the above configuration, the determination state (second state) that is likely to result in an advantageous result makes it easier to execute the specific notification in the specific game. That is, in a judgment state in which an advantageous result is likely to occur, the specific notification is more likely to be executed after the advantageous result is obtained and before the advantageous event occurs. In other words, in a judgment state in which it is difficult to obtain an advantageous result, many games in which the specific notification is not performed from the time when an advantageous result is obtained to the time when an advantageous event occurs may be completed. By doing so, in the configuration for improving the attention level of each game by using the player's psychology expecting execution of the specific notification, the game that can be expected to have the effect of increasing the attention level will have an advantageous event. The harder it is, the more frequent it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention of each game while avoiding an increase in the payout rate due to an excessive increase in the rate of occurrence of advantageous events.

Also, for example, in a configuration in which even after an advantageous event occurs, an advantageous determination is made by taking over the determination state of the previous advantageous determination, or in a configuration in which the previous determination state affects the subsequent determination state. , even after an advantageous result is obtained, it is thought that players will be highly interested in grasping the judgment state of the advantageous judgment by the specific notification, and the judgment of the advantageous judgment can be determined from the timing of the occurrence of the specific notification. A game of predicting the state is added to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A4. The result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means executed in the first state is the advantageous result, and after the advantageous event is generated by the advantageous execution means, the advantageous determination means is advantageous in the first state. A judgment is made, or the advantageous judgment is more likely to be made by the advantageous judgment means in the first state than in the second state, and the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means executed in the second state is the advantageous result, and after the advantageous event has occurred by the advantageous execution means, an advantageous judgment is made by the advantageous judgment means in the second state, or the second state is higher than the first state The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that the advantageous judgment is easily made by the advantageous judgment means.

According to the above configuration, after an advantageous result is obtained in the advantageous judgment and an advantageous event occurs, the judgment state of the previous advantageous judgment is inherited and the advantageous judgment is made, or the judgment state of the previous advantageous judgment is inherited and the advantageous judgment is made. is easily performed, and a game for predicting the judgment state of the advantageous judgment is added from the timing when the specific notification is generated, and the interest in the game is improved.

Feature A5. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. and
The execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the correspondence result is obtained with a third probability when the first identification result is obtained, and is higher than the third probability when the second identification result is obtained. The execution determination is performed so that the corresponding result is obtained with a fourth probability that is a probability,
The product of the first probability and the third probability (5.5% if the continuation rate is 10%, 13.3% if the continuation rate is 90%) is the product of the second probability and the fourth probability ( The game according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it is set to be greater than 0.8% if the continuation rate is 10%, 1.0% if the continuation rate is 90%, and FIG. machine.

According to the above configuration, there is a first identification result and a second identification result that is less likely to be won, and identification is triggered by the second identification result rather than execution determination of specific notification triggered by the first identification result. In a configuration where it is easier to win the notification execution determination, the product of the winning probability of the first specific result (first probability) and the winning probability of the specific notification execution determination triggered by the first specific result (third probability) is set to be greater than the product of the winning probability of the second specific result (second probability) and the winning probability of the execution determination of the specific notification triggered by the second specific result (fourth probability). Therefore, the specific notification triggered by the first identification result is substantially more likely to occur than the specific notification triggered by the second identification result. By doing so, although the second specific result as a so-called rare combination is likely to trigger the specific notification, the second specific result is not easily won, and the specific notification is actually performed. Inconvenience such as the fact that the Therefore, even if it is the first specific result that is relatively easy to win as a lottery result of the game, the specific notification can be expected to be performed, and the effect of improving the degree of attention using the specific notification can be preferably achieved. becomes possible.

Feature A6. The execution determination means is configured to perform execution determination of executing the specific notification at least in the specific game of the special number (10),
The first probability is a probability of 1/1 of the first specific number (1.04);
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the first specific number is set to be smaller than the special number.

According to the above configuration, each probability is set such that the specific game with the first specific result occurs at least once during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is made). Therefore, it is possible to suitably secure an opportunity for execution of the specific notification.

Feature A7. The execution determination means is configured to perform execution determination of executing the specific notification at least in the specific game of the special number (10),
The second probability is a probability of 1/second specific number (28.4),
The gaming machine according to feature A5 or feature A6, wherein the second specific number is set to be larger than the special number.

According to the above configuration, each probability is set so as to increase the possibility that the specific game resulting in the second specific result will not occur even once during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is performed). Since it is set, it is more meaningful to set so that the specific notification triggered by the first specific result can be easily executed.

Feature A8. The execution determination means is configured to perform execution determination of executing the specific notification at least in the specific game of the special number (10),
The first probability is a probability of 1/1 of the first specific number (1.04);
The product of the first probability and the third probability is 1/3 a specific number (approximately 1/18.2 if the continuation rate is 10%, and 1/7.52 if the continuation rate is 90%), The product of the second probability and the fourth probability is 1/4th specific number (about 1/122 if the continuation rate is 10%, about 1/105 if the continuation rate is 90%),
Any one of features A5 to A7, wherein the third specific number can be a value smaller than the special number, while the fourth specific number is set so as not to be a value smaller than the special number. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is performed), the specific notification triggered by the first specific result can occur at least once, while the second specific result can occur. Since it is set so that there is a high possibility that the specific notification as a trigger will not occur even once, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the prepared specific notification is not executed, and to relatively win as a lottery result of the game. It is possible to increase expectations for the first identification result, which is easy to obtain.

Feature A9. Limiting means for limiting execution of the specific notification until at least the advantageous event occurs after the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means (a function of executing a process of setting an occurrence completion flag by the display control device 81) The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, after the specific notification is executed, the re-execution of the specific notification is restricted until an advantageous event occurs. It is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the performance.

Feature A10. As the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, a specific effect in VS display) and a second specific notification in which the notification mode is different to the extent that the player can distinguish from the first specific notification (for example, specific in ally character up) Directing) is set,
The specific notification means executes the first specific notification when executing the specific notification in the first specific game (first game of the set) among the specific games, and the first specific game among the specific games. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that, when executing the specific notification in a second specific game (set 2 to 4 games) different from the specific game, the configuration is such that the second specific notification is executed. .

According to the above configuration, once the specific notification is executed, the subsequent execution of the specific notification is restricted. Therefore, if the user does not try to confirm the occurrence of the specific notification more carefully, there is a high possibility that the execution of the specific notification will be overlooked. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game presentation through the expectation of the specific notification.

Feature A11. The result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is different from the advantageous result, and in the specific game before the specific timing, it is advantageous to cause the advantageous event based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Equipped with second advantage determination means (function for executing AT addition processing by main controller 101) for executing determination,
The advantageous execution means is configured to cause the advantageous event at the specific timing when the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
The execution determination means determines that even in a specific game executed in a situation where the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is the advantageous result and before the specific timing, the lottery result by the lottery means is determined in advance. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein if the result is a predetermined specific result, it is determined whether to execute the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is not an advantageous result, if the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is an advantageous result before the specific timing, the specific timing can be obtained. Advantageous events will occur in Then, even when the result of the advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result, the specific notification can be executed when the specific result is obtained in the specific game before the specific timing. In this case, since the advantage judgment by the second advantage judgment means is made based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the fact that the result of the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means is an advantageous result is determined according to the lottery result of each game. In the configuration of notifying as the specific notification, the configuration is such that the specific notification that an advantageous event actually occurs according to the lottery result of each game is also performed. By doing so, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that, in a situation in which an advantageous result has been obtained in advance by the advantage determination means, it is as if an advantageous result has been obtained according to the lottery result of each game and the specific notification is being executed. becomes.

In addition, in order to clarify the relationship with the "second advantageous determination means" in the above configuration, the "advantageous determination means" in feature A1 may be expressed as the "first advantageous determination means".

Feature A12. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. and
The second advantageous determination means performs an advantageous determination when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the second specified result, and does not perform the advantageous determination when the first specified result. Or, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the second specific result, the advantageous result is more likely to be the advantageous result than the first specific result.
The specific notification means is triggered by the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the first specific result, and the ratio of executing the specific notification is the second specific result. The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that it is set so as to be higher than the rate at which the specific notification is executed.

According to the above configuration, in the advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means, the specific notification is based on the premise that the second specific result, which is less likely to be won than the first specific result, is more likely to be an advantageous result. The specific notification triggered by the first specific result is more likely to occur than the specific notification triggered by the second specific result. It is possible to strongly give the impression that an advantageous event may occur triggered by the first specified result, while preventing the occurrence of an advantageous event too easily. Therefore, in the specific game, even the first specific result, which is likely to be won as a lottery result, can attract more attention while avoiding an increase in the payout rate, and the specific game can be played until an advantageous event occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of

Feature A13. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. and
The execution determination means, when the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is the advantageous result with the second specified result as a trigger, the corresponding result in the specific game that becomes the first specified result means (in the display control device 81, in a game in which an additional winning in a specific role is received and a continuation command is received, if the specific effect lottery is not won, the specific effect in the game is not executed, and a specific effect setting process that is set so that a specific effect can be performed based on winning a specific effect lottery in a game that is a normal role after that). The gaming machine according to feature A11 or feature A12, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the advantage judgment by the second advantage judgment means triggered by the second identification result that is relatively difficult to win is an advantageous result, the identification that has the second identification result The specific notification may be executed not in the game but in the specific game as the first specific result, and the probability that the result of the advantageous determination triggered by the first specific result will be the advantageous result does not become too high. While doing so, it is possible to pseudo-enhance the expectation that the result of the advantageous judgment will be an advantageous result even if it is the first specified result.

Feature A14. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. and
The execution determination means, when the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is the advantageous result with the second specified result as a trigger, the corresponding result in the specific game that has the second specified result means (in the display control device 81, in a game in which an additional winning in a specific role is received and a continuation command is received, if a specific effect lottery is won, it is specified in the game A gaming machine according to any one of features A11 to A13, characterized in that it has a function of executing a specific effect setting process set so that an effect can be performed.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantage judgment by the second advantage judgment means triggered by the second specific result that is relatively difficult to win is an advantageous result, the specific game that has the second specific result is specified. Notification may be executed. In this way, when the second specified result as a so-called rare combination is won in the specified game, the occurrence of an advantageous event triggered by the specified notification is notified by the specified notification, whereby the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is performed in the specified game. It is possible to strongly give the impression that is actually being executed, and as a result, it is not the result of the advantageous judgment performed based on the predetermined judgment opportunity, but the advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means executed in the specific game As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it seem that an advantageous event is occurring.

Feature A15. The result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, and in the specific game before the specific timing, the advantageous determination of causing the advantageous event is executed based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Equipped with third advantage determination means (function for executing AT addition processing by main controller 101),
If the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the advantageous execution means performs after the advantageous event has occurred based on the determination result of the advantageous determination means. , a configuration capable of causing the advantageous event based on the determination result by the third advantageous determination means,
The execution determination means is means capable of performing the execution determination so that the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means is the corresponding result in the specific game in which the result is different from the advantageous result ( A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of performing a specific effect based on a non-winning command by the display control device 81 .

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result, if the result of the advantageous judgment by the third advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result before the specific timing, Then, an advantageous event occurs based on the determination result of the advantageous determination means, and then an advantageous event occurs based on the determination result of the third advantageous determination means. become. Further, in the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result, and when the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means is not an advantageous result, the specific notification is executed. In the specific game, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that an advantageous result is obtained according to the lottery result of the specific game and the specific notification is executed without excessively increasing the winning probability of the advantageous decision by the third advantageous decision means. Become.

In addition, in order to clarify the relationship with the "third advantageous determination means" in the above configuration, the "advantageous determination means" in feature A1 may be expressed as the "first advantageous determination means".

Feature A16. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the advantage determination means makes the advantage determination regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means in the game in which the predetermined determination opportunity has occurred.

According to the above configuration, in order to give the impression that an advantageous event occurs based on the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means as if the advantageous event occurred as a result of the subsequent specific game, the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means It is possible to give the impression that the advantageous event is strongly associated with the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game after that, not the game in which the is played, and it is easy to give the impression that the advantageous event is occurring as a result of the specific game. can do.

Feature A17. As the specific game, a first specific game (for example, a game in which a confrontation effect is performed) in which the specific notification can be executed, and a second specific game in which the specific notification is not executed or the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first specific game 2 A specific game (for example, a game in which a battle effect is performed) is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, wherein the second specific game is executed after the first specific game, and then the specific timing occurs.

According to the above configuration, after the advantageous determination is made, the second specific game is executed in which the specific notification is not performed or is difficult to be performed through the first specific game in which the specific notification can be performed, and then the advantageous event is performed. become possible. By doing so, the timing at which the specific notification is performed becomes limited, and the rarity of the specific notification is increased, thereby making it possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification. Moreover, since it is configured that the second specific game in which the specific notification cannot occur is interposed between the first specific game in which the specific notification can occur and the advantageous event, for example, the specific notification in the second specific game In the case of notifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of an advantageous event by another performance, it is possible to preferably solve the problem that the attention is dispersed due to the mixture of the notification and the specific notification.

Feature A18. In the second specific game, after execution of a predetermined notification (for example, ally attack effect or enemy attack effect), advantageous content (ally victory effect ) and non-advantageous content (enemy victory presentation) corresponding to the fact that the result is different from the above-mentioned advantageous result. A gaming machine according to feature A17, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for performing

According to the above configuration, after the execution of the predetermined notification, the corresponding notification in which either the content notification including the advantageous content or the non-advantageous content is performed in the second specific game, and the result of the advantageous determination is notified. , Since the specific notification is not performed in the second specific game, the occurrence of the specific notification distracts the player's attention from the enjoyment of the advantageous result presentation, and the corresponding notification is fully enjoyed. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of not being able to play, and if the specific notification is performed in the first specific game, only the player who understands the occurrence of the specific notification can play the second specific game. It is possible to enjoy the correspondence notification while immersed in a sense of superiority, such as knowing that the correspondence notification will be advantageous content, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the invention described in the features A1 to A18 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features A1 to A18, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 individually, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for granting a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set). While moving to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
Determining whether to execute a specific notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition in the unit state in which the continuation condition is established and which precedes the game in which the unit state ends. Execution determination means (function for executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81),
When the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification, the specific notification means for executing the specific notification (the display control device 81 executes processing for performing a specific effect function) and
with
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first advantageous state are set. has been
In a situation where the continuation condition is established, the second advantageous state is set so that the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be executed than the first advantageous state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games played or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is

Then, in a unit state in which a continuation condition is satisfied, a specific notification may be made as an advance notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition before the unit state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make use of the player's psychology of wanting to feel relieved by confirming that the continuation condition is established, to stir up expectations for the specific notification, and to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Moreover, as the advantageous state, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, in which the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied, are set. It is set so that the advantageous state is more likely to occur. Therefore, the generation of the specific notification does not simply indicate the satisfaction of the continuation condition in the unit state, but indicates the continuation rate of the unit state depending on the timing of occurrence. In other words, when a specific notification occurs, it not only suggests that the unit state will continue, but it also suggests that the continuation rate of the unit state is high, and it is possible to raise expectations for the specific notification. Become.

In addition, as in the above configuration, the higher the continuation rate, the more likely the specific notification occurs, so the number of games from the start of the unit state to the occurrence of the specific notification is advantageous in that the continuation rate is high. The lower the state, the lower the number, and the lower the continuity rate, the higher the number.

Here, if it is assumed that the player is looking forward to the occurrence of the specific notification, in one unit state, the number of games to look forward to whether the specific notification will occur, that is, the occurrence of the specific notification It is considered that the greater the number of games played before the game is played, the more the excitement of the unit state can be fully enjoyed. In that respect, as the continuation rate is low as described above, the number of games until the specific notification occurs increases, so even if the continuation rate is in an advantageous state with a low continuation rate, it is exciting whether the specific notification will occur It is a configuration that allows you to fully enjoy the feeling. Conversely, the higher the continuation rate, the fewer the number of games played until the specific notification in one unit state occurs. It is possible to compensate for the fact that the number of games played until the occurrence of is small. As a result, at each continuation rate, it is possible to fully enjoy the game in which the occurrence of the specific notification is expected.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the execution determination means determines execution of the specific notification according to a lottery result of the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the execution determination of the execution of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game. can also be noticed. In particular, it is possible to give the impression that success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game by making a specific notification according to the lottery result of each game. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

Feature B3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is the corresponding result is higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. is set to be higher than
The game according to feature B2, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specified result is set to the same probability or substantially the same probability for the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. machine.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game is a specific result with the same winning probability regardless of the type of advantageous state, the probability that the determination result of the execution determination is the execution result is the second advantageous state than the first advantageous state. Since the state is set to be higher, as a result, the occurrence rate of the specific notification is higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. By doing so, even if the winning probability of the lottery result of each game is not changed according to each advantageous state, the excellent effect of the feature B1 can be expected only by changing the winning probability of the execution lottery of the specific information. becomes possible.

Feature B4. updating means for updating the unit state (function for executing AT mode processing by the main controller 101);
satisfaction determination means (function for executing continuation determination processing by the main controller 101) for determining whether the continuation condition is satisfied when the unit state is updated by the update means;
with
A probability that the establishment determination result by the establishment determination means is a result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is set to be higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. and
A first control device (main control device 101) comprising at least the update means and the establishment determination means, and a second control device different from the first control device, the second control device comprising the execution determination means and the specific notification means. a control device (display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized by having:

According to the above configuration, when the unit state is updated, it is determined whether the continuation condition is met or not, and the level of the continuation rate depends on the probability that the continuation condition is determined to be met in the determination. . The first control device updates the unit state and determines whether the continuation condition is established, and the second control device determines whether to execute the specific notification or executes the specific notification. It is possible to prevent a local increase in processing load.

Note that the "updating means" is limited to "updating means for updating the unit state so as to shift to the next unit state when the unit state ends while the continuation condition is satisfied". good too.

In addition, regarding the ``satisfaction determining means'', ``when the updating means terminates the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, or when a new unit state is started after being updated by the updating means, Alternatively, it may be limited to "satisfaction determination means for determining whether the continuation condition is satisfied."

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the success determination means is configured to perform the success determination regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means in the game for which the success determination is performed.

According to the above configuration, regardless of the lottery result of the game, the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined based on the continuation rate set according to the type of advantageous state. By doing so, the processing configuration for determining whether the continuation condition is successful or not can be made extremely simple, and the more the lottery result of the game exceeds the design value, the more the unit state will continue. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such an event.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The establishment determination means performs the establishment determination with a first probability in the first advantageous state, and the second probability in the second advantageous state, regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means in the game in which the establishment determination is performed. The gaming machine according to feature B4, characterized in that the establishment determination is made with a probability of 2."

Feature B6. Second feasibility determination means (main controller 101) for executing a second feasibility determination to satisfy the continuation condition in the unit state based on the lottery result of the lottery means in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not established. function to execute AT addition processing by
According to feature B4 or feature B5, the second establishment determination means is configured to perform the second establishment determination with a common probability in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the determination result of the continuation determination performed when the unit state is updated indicates that the continuation condition is not satisfied, the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of the game in the unit state after the update. Since the second establishment determination that establishes is performed, the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game can be preferably increased. Moreover, since the second establishment determination is made according to the lottery result of each game without depending on whether the continuation rate of the advantageous state is high or low, for example, even if the continuation rate of the advantageous state is low, Therefore, the decline in interest in the game can be favorably suppressed without making the player give up.

It should be noted that the description that "the second determination is made with a common probability in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state" means "when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result , if the first advantageous state, the second establishment determination is performed so that the establishment result corresponds to the establishment of the continuation condition with a first probability; if the second advantageous state, the If the second success determination is performed so that the success result is obtained with a first probability, and if the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result different from the first result, if the first advantageous state , the second establishment determination is performed so that the establishment result is obtained with a second probability different from the first probability, and if the second advantageous state is obtained, the establishment result is obtained with the second probability. The second establishment judgment is performed according to the lottery result of each game without depending on the type of advantageous state. It is not excluded that the probability of establishing the continuation condition differs depending on the result of the lottery.

Feature B7. The execution determination means determines execution of the specific notification according to a lottery result of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined first specific result (loss result). a probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determining means is the corresponding result is set to be higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state; When the lottery result is a second specified result (watermelon) different from the first specified result, the probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determining means is the corresponding result is higher than the second advantageous state. It is set so that the first advantageous state is higher,
Any of features B1 to B6, wherein the lottery means is set so that the probability that the lottery result will be the first specified result is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the second specified result. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the execution determination of the execution of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game. can also be noticed. In particular, it is possible to give the impression that success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game by making a specific notification according to the lottery result of each game. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

Moreover, if the lottery result of the game is the first specified result, the first advantageous state is more likely to execute the specified notification than the second advantageous state, and if the second specified result is the second advantageous state rather than the first advantageous state. is set so that the specific notification is more likely to be executed, and the first specific result is more likely to appear as the lottery result of the game than the second specific result. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the specific notification is more likely to be executed in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, even though the occurrence rate of the specific notification differs according to the lottery result of each game. . By doing so, the game property of predicting the high or low continuation rate from the occurrence rate of the specific notification, or the game property of varying the number of games that provide a thrilling feeling until the specific notification occurs according to the high or low continuation rate , the relationship between the lottery result of the game and the rate of occurrence of the specific notification can be varied, and the game playability can be favorably improved.

Feature B8. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function of executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101);
Special notification means capable of executing special notification corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a function of executing a suggestive effect setting process or a lottery process for the number of ending games by the display control device 81);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the execution probability or execution mode of the special notification by the special notification means differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. .

According to the above configuration, since the execution probability and execution mode of the special notification as the suggestive effect of the set value differ according to the continuation rate of the advantageous state, the continuation rate is high simply so that one advantageous state can be continued for a long time. It is possible to add not only the game property that expects the above, but also the game property that the advantageous state is expected to be a continuation rate that makes it easy to distinguish and predict the set value by special notification, and the interest of the game is suitable. can be improved to

In this case, the high or low continuation rate can be predicted and determined based on the occurrence rate of specific notifications, but when a special notification occurs, the set value can be narrowed down based on the relationship with the continuation rate predicted and determined by the specific notification. Since it is configured to carry out, the degree of attention to the specific notification is further increased in the sense of obtaining judgment materials for predicting and judging the set value.

It should be noted that the "special notification means" can also be expressed as follows.

"Special notification means capable of executing special notification corresponding to special information (set value, AT set counter information) beneficial to the player (for example, suggestive effect setting processing by display control device 81, ending game number lottery processing, , a function of executing processing for performing a suggestive effect of the AT set counter).

Feature B9. When the first setting values (settings 1 and 2) are set by the setting means, the special notification by the special notification means is likely to be executed in the first mode (long ending game number) in the first advantageous state. On the other hand, in the second advantageous state, the special notification by the special notification means is likely to be executed in the second mode (short ending game number),
When second setting values (settings 5 and 6) different from the first setting value are set by the setting means, the special notification by the special notification means is performed in the second mode in the first advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature B8, characterized in that the special notification by the special notification means is easily executed in the second advantageous state while being easily executed in the first mode.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of feature B8, and by configuring it to be able to narrow down the setting value by the aspect of special notification and the continuation rate (type of advantageous state) as in the above configuration. , it becomes possible to synergistically improve the degree of attention to the specific notification.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B8 or feature B9, wherein the special notification means is configured to be capable of executing the special notification when the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means.

As in the above configuration, by executing a specific notification with a different probability of occurrence depending on the continuation rate, it is possible to execute a special notification as a setting suggestion. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification as a preliminary stage by using it.

Feature B11. The special notification means executes the special notification in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, or executes the special notification when the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied ends. The game machine according to any one of features B8 to B10, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured as follows.

According to the above configuration, the situation of confirming the specific notification in anticipation of the advantageous state continuing for a long time and the special notification as a setting suggestion performed when the advantageous state ends is clearly distinguished. Thus, it is possible to avoid an event in which both notifications are overlooked due to trying to confirm both notifications, and it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load due to trying to generate both notifications in the same situation. becomes possible. Then, for example, even if the advantageous state ends with a small number of updates of the unit state, is the termination due to the low continuation rate (first advantageous state) in the first place? By grasping whether it is caused by the fact that the continuation condition was not met by chance despite the continuation rate (second advantageous state), by the time the special notification is executed, setting The configuration enables narrowing down of values. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately increase the significance of predicting and ascertaining the continuation rate based on the specific notification. If so, the motivation to predict the set value can be enhanced, and it is possible to change the mind when the advantageous state ends.

Feature B12. In one of the unit states, after the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, the means for limiting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (the display control device 81 executes a process of setting an occurrence completion flag The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, characterized in that it has a function of

According to the above configuration, in one unit state, after the specific notification as the advance notification is executed, the execution of the specific notification again is restricted. That is, in a configuration in which the higher the continuation rate of the unit state is, the more likely the specific notification is to occur, the higher the continuation rate is, the more games are played until the update of the unit state after the specific notification is performed. In other words, the lower the continuation rate, the smaller the number of games played until the update of the unit state after the specific notification is performed, and the relatively larger number of games played until the specific notification is performed.

Here, if it is assumed that the player is looking forward to the occurrence of the specific notification, in one unit state, the number of games to look forward to whether the specific notification will occur, that is, the occurrence of the specific notification It is considered that the greater the number of games played before the game is played, the more the excitement of the unit state can be fully enjoyed. In that respect, as described above, the lower the continuation rate, the more the number of games until the specific notification occurs, so even if the continuation rate is in an advantageous state with a low continuation rate, you can fully enjoy the excitement of whether or not the specific notification will occur. It will be a configuration that allows you to entertain yourself. Conversely, the higher the continuation rate, the fewer the number of games played until the specific notification in one unit state occurs. It is possible to compensate for the fact that the number of games played until the occurrence of is small. As a result, at each continuation rate, it is possible to fully enjoy the game in which the occurrence of the specific notification is expected.

In addition, the invention described in the features B1 to B12 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features B1 to B12, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 individually, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game, which is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is defined as one unit state in which a predetermined number of games (18 games) or more are played. While transitioning to a state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state,
In a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (for example, a specific win such as Cherry A), it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, and the lottery is performed. If the result of the lottery by the means is a second result different from the first result (for example, a normal combination such as a push order bell), the establishment determination is not performed, or the continuation is performed rather than the first result. Establishment determination means (function for executing AT addition processing by the main control unit 101) that executes the establishment determination so that the condition is less likely to be established;
In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, specific notification means (display control device 81 A function to execute processing for performing a specific effect by) and
with
The game machine is characterized in that the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be performed in the game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result than in the game in which the lottery result is the first result.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games played or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is Moreover, in a unit state in which the condition for continuation is not satisfied, if the lottery result of the game is the first result, then determination is made that the condition for continuation is more likely to be satisfied in the unit state than in the case of the second result. The lottery result of each game in the unit state is favorably paid attention to.

However, for example, given the specific number of games in the unit state and the winning probability of the first result, it may be rare for the first result to be won during one unit state. However, there is a possibility that the player will not have much expectation for the establishment determination that has been prepared with much effort. On the other hand, if you increase the number of specific numbers, raise the winning probability of the first result too high, or raise the winning probability of the success judgment too high, there is a possibility that the ball payout rate will skyrocket. can not deny.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, a specific notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition can be generated before the unit state ends. , Since the specific notification is set to occur more easily in the game with the second result than in the first result, whether the continuation condition in the current unit state is satisfied in the game with the second result It is possible to give an impression such as By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the expectation for the establishment determination without increasing the specific number.

Feature C2. In a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition, the means for restricting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (the continuation command by the display control device 81 The game machine according to feature C1 is characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of not performing the specific performance if the specific performance lottery is not won even if the game receives the .

According to the above configuration, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted in the game in which the establishment result corresponds to the establishment of the continuation condition, the first result is more likely than the second result. It is possible to make it difficult for specific notification to be performed in the game, which is the first result, even though the result of the establishment determination is likely to be the establishment result. By doing so, it is possible to make the player look forward to the game, which is the second result.

In addition, the above configuration does not deny that the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means in the game in which the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition. Any configuration may be used as long as the specific notification may not be executed in the game that results in establishment. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific notification is not completely executed in the game that results in establishment, in which case the effects described above can be expected more clearly.

Feature C3. In a situation where the continuation condition is established, a second establishment judgment means for judging that the continuation condition of the unit state after the next time of the unit state is established (executing AT addition processing by the main controller 101) function),
The specific notification means is a non-establishment means for executing the specific notification in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means does not result in establishment corresponding to establishment of the continuation condition. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, characterized by comprising (a function of executing a process of performing a specific effect based on reception of a non-winning command by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the result of the establishment determination as a so-called additional judgment such as establishing the continuation condition after the next time is not satisfied, and the additional judgment is not won, the specific notification is executed in the game. be able to be By doing so, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the specific notification while preventing the continuation rate of the unit state from becoming too high, and it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the specific notification is performed in each game. It becomes possible.

Feature C4. The second success determination means performs the success determination when the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, and makes the success determination when the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result. not performed, or executing the establishment determination so that the continuation condition is less likely to be established than in the case of the first result,
The non-establishment means executes the specific notification in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means based on the first result does not become the establishment result, The specific notification is not executed in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means does not become the establishment result, or the specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the case based on the first result. The gaming machine according to feature C3, characterized in that it is set to .

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific notification is likely to be executed when the second result determination based on the first result determines that the winning is not successful. By doing so, it is possible to increase the occurrence rate of the specific notification without excessively increasing the winning probability of the success determination by the second success determination means. Moreover, the first result is more likely to win the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means than the second result, so the association between the first result and the specific notification It is easy to perform, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the specific notification at the time of the first result (reliability that the continuation condition is established based on the first result of this time).

Feature C5. In the unit state, any of including advantageous content corresponding to the fact that the continuation condition of the unit state is established after execution of the predetermined notification and non-advantageous content corresponding to the fact that the continuation condition is not established in the unit state (a function of executing a process for performing a battle effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a corresponding notification for executing the content notification of
Even if the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is an establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition, in the game corresponding to the execution of the correspondence notification by the correspondence notification means, the Means for limiting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (function for executing processing for not performing the specific effect during the battle effect by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the success or failure of the continuation condition is notified by the content notification of the advantageous content or the non-advantageous content after the predetermined notification, the success or failure of the continuation condition is reported. Even if the conditions are satisfied, the execution of the specific notification is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid a decrease in interest in the prepared response notification.

Feature C6. After the start of the correspondence notification, if the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination unit is the establishment result, the means for changing the content notification in the correspondence notification to the advantageous content ( The gaming machine according to feature C5, further comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S2014 and S2015 as the processing for rewriting the battle by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, even if the execution of the specific notification is restricted when the continuation condition is satisfied during the corresponding notification, the content notification in the corresponding notification is rewritten, so whether the corresponding notification and the continuation condition are satisfied or not. so that there is no contradiction with

Feature C7. Means for permitting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (continuation command by display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics C1 to C6, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for performing a specific effect in the game that receives the .

According to the above configuration, since the execution of the specific notification may be permitted in the game in which the result of establishment corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is allowed, the first result is the first result. In a configuration in which the result of the establishment determination is more likely to be the establishment result than in the case of two results, and in which the specific notification is more likely to be performed in the case of the second result than in the case of the first result, the first result It is possible to make it so that the specific notification may be performed even in the game that is the result. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity in presentation that the specific notification is not executed even though the player has won the first result as a so-called rare combination.

In addition, the above configuration denies that the specific notification is not executed by the specific notification means (configuration of feature C2) in the game in which the result of establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition. However, it is sufficient if there is a case where the specific notification is executed at least in the game that becomes the establishment result. However, it may be configured such that the specific notification is always executed in the game that results in establishment.

Feature C8. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, execution determination means for determining execution of the specific notification based on the lottery result of the lottery means (executing the specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81 function),
The execution determination means performs the execution determination regardless of whether or not the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means corresponds to the establishment of the continuation condition in the current game. The gaming machine according to any one of the characterizing features C1 to C7.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied by the success determination by the success determination means, regardless of whether or not it is a game, execution determination of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of the lottery means in the current game. By doing so, it is possible to set the occurrence rate of the specific notification separately from the winning probability in the determination of success, even though the determination is made according to the lottery result of each game, and the occurrence rate can be adjusted. It becomes possible to expect the effect of the feature C1 by doing.

Feature C9. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, execution determination means for determining execution of the specific notification based on the lottery result of the lottery means (executing the specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81 function),
The lottery means performs the lottery to obtain the first result with a first probability, and performs the lottery to obtain the second result with a second probability higher than the first probability. is a
The execution determination means performs the execution determination so as to result in execution of the specific notification with a third probability when the first result is obtained, and the third probability when the second result is obtained. The execution determination is performed so as to result in executing the specific notification at a fourth probability that is lower than
Rather than the product of the first probability and the third probability (0.8% if the continuity rate is 10%, 1.0% if the continuity rate is 90%), The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the rate is set to be 5.5% if the rate is 10%, and 13.3% if the continuation rate is 90% (Fig. 51). .

According to the above configuration, there is a first result and a second result that is more likely to be won, and the execution determination of the specific notification triggered by the first result is the execution of the specific notification triggered by the second result. In a configuration that is easier to win than the determination, the second result is more likely than the product of the winning probability of the first result (first probability) and the winning probability (third probability) of the specific notification execution determination triggered by the first result is set so that the product of the winning probability (second probability) and the winning probability (fourth probability) of the execution determination of the specific notification triggered by the second result is set to be larger. The specific notification triggered by the second result is more likely to occur than the specific notification triggered by the first result. By doing so, although it is easy to execute the specific notification triggered by the first result as a so-called rare hand, it is difficult to win the first result, and in fact, there are not many opportunities for the specific notification to be executed. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience such as "no". Therefore, it is possible to expect that the specific notification will be performed even in the case of the second result that is relatively easy to win as a lottery result of the game, and it is possible to have a configuration that preferably exhibits the effect of improving the degree of attention using the specific notification. It becomes possible.

In addition, the invention described in the above features C1 to C9 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features C1 to C9, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 individually, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
Advantageous determination means (continuation determination processing and AT addition processing by the main controller 101) for executing an advantageous determination to cause an advantageous event (AT mode set continuation) that is advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity. functions to perform) and
If the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the advantageous execution means (AT mode by main controller 101) that causes the advantageous event at a predetermined specific timing A function to start a new set in the processing for use, for example, a function to execute the processing of steps S1404 to S1406);
Execution judging means for judging whether to execute the specific notification corresponding to the fact that the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judging means is the advantageous result and in a specific situation before the specific timing. (function of executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81);
Specific notification means for executing the specific notification (function for executing specific effect setting processing by the display control device 81) based on the determination result by the execution determination means;
In the specific situation, after execution of a predetermined notification (for example, an ally attack presentation or an enemy attack presentation), advantageous content (ally victory presentation) corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination being the advantageous result and not the advantageous result Corresponding notification means capable of executing any of content notifications including unadvantageous content (enemy victory effect) corresponding to this )When,
Limiting means for limiting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means in a situation where the corresponding notification is performed by the corresponding notification means (specific effect setting processing according to the value of the sub-side AT counter by the display control device 81 A function that executes processing, etc. to prevent
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, an advantageous judgment is made to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player, and if the result of the advantageous judgment is an advantageous result, the advantageous event occurs at a predetermined specific timing. As a result, the game is diversified by adding a game that causes an advantageous event to the game, such as obtaining a privilege in each game.

In such a game, depending on the degree of advantage of the advantageous event, the player's interest is focused on the advantageous judgment that causes the advantageous event rather than the lottery result of each game or the awarding of benefits based on the lottery result. As a result, there is an undeniable possibility that the playability of the slot machine, in which the player's operation is involved in the start of the game and awarding of benefits, will be neglected. In particular, when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the game until an advantageous event occurs becomes a game waiting for an advantageous event, and the player's interest may be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to execute a specific notification corresponding to an advantageous result in a specific situation after the result of the advantageous determination that causes the advantageous event becomes an advantageous result and before the advantageous event occurs. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while anticipating that the specific notification will be performed in each game before the occurrence of the advantageous event. Further, in a specific situation, after the execution of the predetermined notification, the content notification including the advantageous content corresponding to the advantageous result and the non-advantageous content corresponding to the non-advantageous result of the advantageous judgment is performed. is executed, so that when the predetermined notification is performed, attention is drawn to which content notification is performed, and the effect is produced in accordance with the progress of the game toward the specific timing when the advantageous event occurs can be greatly enhanced.

On the other hand, in the corresponding notification in which the result of the advantageous determination is notified by the final content notification as described above, the content is determined by the notification content (predetermined notification mode) in the game before the game in which the content notification is performed. In some cases, the notification may be predicted to some extent, and in particular, if the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result is performed during the corresponding notification, the interest in the content notification fades and the attention to the game is extremely reduced. It may get lost.

On the other hand, there are also needs of players who expect specific notifications as advance notifications of advantageous events, and there is concern about loss of game opportunities due to a configuration in which specific notifications are not performed.

Therefore, in the above configuration, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted only during the correspondence notification, the specific notification can be performed in a specific situation after the advantageous determination is made until the advantageous event occurs. A game is clearly distinguished from a game in which the corresponding notification is performed without the specific notification, and the performance effect by both notifications is preferable while preventing inconvenience due to overlapping of the corresponding notification and the specific notification. can be expected.

Feature D2. As the game executed in the specific situation, a first specific game in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, and a game after the first specific game in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means is restricted by the restriction means, and a second specific game in which the correspondence notification is performed by the correspondence notification means is set.

According to the above configuration, the correspondence notification in which the result of the advantageous determination is notified by the content notification after the predetermined notification is performed in the second specific game in the specific situation, and in the first specific game before the second specific game Therefore, a specific notification corresponding to an advantageous result can be made. In other words, after an advantageous determination is made, after a game in which a specific notification that definitely notifies the result of the advantageous determination can be performed, there is a corresponding notification in which the result of the advantageous determination is notified by the content notification after the predetermined notification. The configuration is such that the game to be executed is set. By doing so, the specific notification is performed after the corresponding notification of the advantageous content is performed, or the specific notification is not performed even though the corresponding notification of the advantageous content is performed. It is possible to expect a dramatic effect from both notifications while avoiding duplication and contradiction.

Feature D3. A plurality of modes of the predetermined notification in the correspondence notification by the corresponding notification means are set, and selection means (from the battle effect table by the display control device 81) for selecting the mode of the current predetermined notification from the multiple set modes function to execute the process of selecting the production table this time),
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the selection means can select the mode of the predetermined notification regardless of whether or not the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the selection means selects the mode of the predetermined notification by the corresponding notification means, there is no need to grasp whether or not the specific notification is executed. Therefore, the processing configuration of the selection means becomes overwhelmingly simple, and since there is no need to store the predetermined notification of the pattern when the specific notification is executed, it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity.

Further, for example, in the case of a configuration premised on a specific notification, a definitive notification mode is selected in which when the specific notification occurs, it is notified that the continuation condition is satisfied at the time of the content notification in the corresponding notification. , If such a mode is prepared, even if such a mode is selected, for example, if the specific notification is overlooked, the specific notification is missed in the definitive notification mode. A player may be notified of this after a while, which may cause inconvenience. Then, from the viewpoint of preventing overlooking of the specific notification, circumstances may arise in which the specific notification must be set in a flashy presentation mode. On the other hand, as in the above-described configuration, by setting a presentation mode that does not use a corresponding notification on the premise of the specific notification, it is possible to set the mode of the notification in a manner that allows the overlooking of the specific notification. It becomes the structure which does not need to make specific alert|report itself into a very flashy presentation. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a mode in which the generation of the specific notification cannot be grasped unless the player pays more attention to the performance, and the degree of attention to the game performance can be favorably increased by utilizing the player's psychology not to miss the specific notification. can be increased to

Feature D4. A plurality of modes of the predetermined notification in the correspondence notification by the corresponding notification means are set, and selection means (from the battle effect table by the display control device 81) for selecting the mode of the current predetermined notification from the multiple set modes function to execute the process of selecting the production table this time),
The selection means is configured to select the mode of the predetermined notification, which is a predetermined specific mode when the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means,
The selection means is characterized in that it is possible to select the mode of the predetermined notification to be the specific mode even when the specific notification by the specific notification means is not executed. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the selection means selects the mode of predetermined notification by the corresponding notification means, the predetermined notification mode, which is the specific mode, is selected if the specific notification is being executed. By doing so, the mode of the predetermined notification is set to one mode with the execution of the specific notification, so that the processing configuration can be simplified. Moreover, since the mode of the predetermined notification that becomes the specific mode can be selected even when the specific notification is not executed, the mode of the predetermined notification that becomes the specific mode is exclusively used when the specific notification is executed. It can also contribute to the reduction of storage capacity compared to the configuration prepared as , and there is no need to make the specific notification flashy to prevent the specific notification from being overlooked, and the degree of attention to the specific notification can also be increased.

Feature D5. The game according to feature D4, wherein specific information (AT mode continuation rate, setting value) that can be beneficial to the player is suggested by the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means. machine.

According to the above configuration, if it is assumed that the specific information is suggested by the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means, the execution of the specific notification makes the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means unique. In the configuration of feature D4, which is a specific mode (specific mode), there is a possibility that the player will not be able to know the specific information due to the specific notification. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by making the player look forward to the specific information, but not knowing the specific information in exchange for it.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the specific information is suggested by a mode (occurrence rate) of the specific notification by the specific notification means.

With the above configuration, although the specific information is not suggested by the specific notification mode, the specific information is suggested from the specific notification mode, so that the specific information is not suggested. Players who want to know will pay more attention to the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the game.

Feature D7. Even if the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, the specific notification may not be performed by the specific notification means. According to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that when the result is the advantageous result, the content notification in the correspondence notification by the correspondence notification means is set so as not to be the non-advantageous content. game machine.

According to the above configuration, if the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the corresponding information will always be advantageous, but the specific information may not be executed. By doing so, basically, it is assumed that the result of the advantageous judgment is clearly notified by the corresponding notification, but it may be possible to know the details of the notification by the specific notification. The specific notification can be interpreted as an auxiliary notification of the corresponding notification. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of advantage in knowing whether or not the specific notification will be made by the specific notification, and it is possible to make the user look forward to the specific notification.

Feature D8. In the game executed in the specific situation, game notification means for performing game notification by predetermined notification means (function for executing processing for performing confrontation effect by display control device 81),
The specific notification means executes, as the specific notification, changing a part of the game notification by the game notification means from a normal mode (for example, white character VS display) to a specific mode (for example, red character VS display). is the configuration,
The game notification means can execute the game notification in the normal mode when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, and the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the game notification can be executed in the normal mode when the result is different from the result.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed by changing part of the game notification performed in each game from the normal mode to the specific mode. In this case, the game notification in the normal mode is executed both when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result and when it is not an advantageous result. In other words, even if the specific notification is not performed, it does not indicate that it is not an advantageous result, and since the specific notification only changes part of the game notification to the specific mode, it is not overlooked. more likely to be By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game performance by utilizing the player's psychology that he does not want to miss the specific notification.

Feature D9. Features D1 to D8, wherein the execution determination means is configured to determine execution of the specific notification based on the lottery result of the lottery means in the game executed in the specific situation. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, execution of the specific notification is determined based on the lottery result of each game in the specific situation. By doing so, the specific notification and the lottery result of each game are closely associated, for example, an advantageous determination is made according to the lottery result in the game in which the specific notification occurs, and the advantageous result is obtained in the advantageous determination. It is also possible to give the impression that

Feature D10. The predetermined notification is configured to be executed over a plurality of games,
Notification mode information storage means (various table storage area 182a by display control device 81) for storing a notification mode information group (battle effect table) in which a plurality of types of notification modes of the predetermined notification over the plurality of games are set;
Notification mode selection means (display a function of executing processing for selecting the current battle effect table by the control device 81;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein the corresponding notification means executes the predetermined notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined notification in the correspondence notification is executed over a plurality of games, and the predetermined notification is in the notification mode selected from the notification mode information group based on the result of the advantageous determination. done. Here, in the configuration in which the predetermined notification is performed over a plurality of games, if the configuration is such that the specific notification may be performed in the game in which the predetermined notification is performed, it is necessary to determine the notification mode of the predetermined notification in each game. If it is not configured to determine the notification mode of the predetermined notification in each game, there is a possibility that the specific notification to be executed and the content notification after that cannot be matched. In that respect, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted in the game in which the corresponding notification is executed as described above, it is not necessary to set the notification mode of the predetermined notification in each game, and the configuration is relatively simple. It becomes possible to perform corresponding notification.

Feature D11. A first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) having different probabilities that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result are set. cage,
The execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the probability of execution of the specific notification is different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the specific notification differs according to the winning probability of the advantageous judgment, and a game such as predicting the winning probability of the advantageous judgment through the occurrence rate of the specific notification is added. Become. By doing so, it is possible not only to grasp the result of the advantageous determination by performing the specific notification, but also to predict the winning probability of the advantageous determination, so that the degree of attention to the specific notification can be appropriately increased. can be increased.

The inventions described in the features D1 to D11 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features D1 to D11, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 individually, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set). While moving to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
In the advantageous state, a special number (10 games) less than the specific number is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and if the notification continuation condition for the unit notification state is satisfied, the Notification control means for starting the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state, but not starting the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state if the notification continuation condition is not satisfied. (a function of executing processing for performing a pseudo-set effect by the display control device 81);
When the notification continuation condition in the unit notification state is established, specific notification means (the third a function to execute processing for performing a specific effect or a fourth specific effect);
When the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means in one of the unit notification states, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state. A means for enabling (a function of executing a process of moving to the next pseudo set based on the third specific effect or the fourth specific effect in the pseudo set effect by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games played or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is Moreover, in the advantageous state, a special number of games that is less than the specific number of continuous games in the unit state is set as one unit notification state, and if the notification continuation condition for the unit notification state is satisfied, the unit notification state is continued. After the end, the next unit notification state is started, and if the notification continuation condition of the unit notification state is not satisfied, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished. The number of repetitions of the unit notification state is likely to be greater than the number of repetitions of the unit state in the state. By increasing the number of repetitions of the notification state, it is possible to make it appear as if the continuation condition is likely to be established.

However, in such a configuration that repeats the unit notification state in which the number of games is less than the number of games in the unit state, it may be difficult to match the game in which the unit state ends with the game in which the unit notification state ends. There is More specifically, if it is not a common divisor of the specific number, which is the number of games in the unit state, and the special number, which is the number of games in the unit notification state, there are games in which the unit state ends and games in which the unit notification state ends. If they do not match, there is a possibility that the presentation effect by the unit notification state cannot be favorably expected.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the notification continuation condition is established in the unit notification state, the specific notification is executed, and the unit is triggered by the specific notification regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state. Since the notification state is ended and the next unit notification state is started, the number of games in the unit notification state can be easily matched with the number of games in the unit state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably expect the production effect by repeating the unit notification state with the number of games smaller than the unit state.

Feature E2. Means (AT game counter by main controller 101) for limiting the termination of the unit state under the condition that the number of games remaining in the unit state exists when the continuation condition is satisfied in the unit state A gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of not updating the AT mode set before the AT mode becomes 0.

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state side ends the unit notification state and starts the next unit notification state regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state, with the specific notification as a trigger, while the unit state side , even if the continuation condition is satisfied, under the condition that the number of games remaining in the unit state remains, the termination of the unit state and the start of the next unit state are restricted. In this way, by adjusting only the number of games on the unit notification state side to match the number of games in both states, it is possible to match the number of games in both states with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature E3. The specific notification means is a first means for executing the specific notification according to the number of games remaining in the unit state (for generating a specific effect when updating a set that has not received a continuation command from the display control device 81). A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state is updated by generating the specific notification according to the number of remaining games on the unit state side, so the number of remaining games in the unit state and the number of continuous games in the unit notification state (special number ) can be adjusted without discomfort.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the first means executes the specific notification in a game in which the number of remaining games in the unit state is greater than the special number.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed to end the unit notification state, and even if the next unit notification state is started, before the remaining number of games in the unit state is consumed, the special number in the next unit notification state It is possible to digest the number of games of Therefore, for example, the event that the unit state ends in the middle of the unit notification state does not occur, and it is possible to adjust the number of remaining games in the unit state and the number of continuous games in the unit notification state without discomfort. .

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to feature E3 or feature E4, wherein the first means executes the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. .

In the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is completed, there are games equal to or greater than the specified number in the next unit state. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the opportunity to perform the specific notification according to the remaining number of games is limited to the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the processing for performing the specific notification according to the remaining number of games is executed. The frequency can be lowered, and the simplification of processing can be achieved.

Feature E6. The specific notification means is a second means for executing the specific notification regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied (a third specific effect lottery by the display control device 81). and a function of executing processing for performing these specific effects based on a fourth specific effect lottery).

In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is completed, there are games of a specific number or more in the next unit state, and at any timing the specific notification is executed. A special number of games in the next unit notification state can be played. Therefore, in the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, the specific notification is executed regardless of the number of remaining games, thereby generating randomness in the execution timing of the specific notification. is possible, it becomes difficult to know when the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is updated, and it is possible to diversify the performance.

Feature E7. The second means includes execution determination means (display control) for determining execution of the specific notification according to a lottery result of the lottery means in each game in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. A function of executing a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the device 81), and executing the specific notification based on the determination result by the execution determination means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the execution determination of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game. Such an impression can be given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to each game.

Feature E8. The specific notification means executes the specific notification when the number of games in the unit notification state reaches the special number in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for performing a third specific effect or a fourth specific effect in the last game of (1).

According to the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific notification is executed in the final game of the unit notification state, so that the unit notification state ends without the specific notification being performed. You can eliminate the inconvenience of doing. In this case, regardless of what game number in the unit state the last game in the unit notification state in which the specific notification is performed is, there is a number of games to complete the next unit notification state after the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the number of games between the unit state and the unit notification state without difficulty.

Feature E9. In the unit notification state, the special number of games is executed without performing the specific notification, and after the unit notification state ends, a predetermined end notification is executed in the game until the end game in which the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, further comprising end notification means (a function of executing processing for performing an ending effect by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, even if the game in which the unit state ends does not completely match the game in which the unit notification state ends, the difference can be made up by the predetermined end notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to reasonably adjust the number of games between the unit state and the unit notification state.

Feature E10. The end notification means can execute the predetermined end notification over a first number of games, and can execute over a second number of games different from the first number. The gaming machine of feature E9, wherein:

According to the above configuration, the predetermined number of games for end notification can be either the first number or the second number. There is no need to have a uniform number of games. By doing so, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the number of games in the unit notification state matches the number of games in the unit state with a relatively simple configuration.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"When the number of games played from the end of the unit notification state to the end of the advantageous state is a first number, the end notification means provides the predetermined end notification over the first number of games. If the number of games played from the end of the unit notification state to the end of the advantageous state is a second number different from the first number, the predetermined number of games is played over the second number of games The gaming machine according to feature E9, characterized in that it notifies the end of ".

Feature E11. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function of executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
When the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the specific notification means is configured such that, in the unit notification state, the special number of games is completed without the specific notification being performed, and the After the unit notification state ends, the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state before the unit notification state to be ended so that the number of finished games until the end game in which the advantageous state ends is likely to be the first number, When the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the ending game number is set so as to easily become a second number different from the first number. Fourth means capable of executing the specific notification in the unit notification state before the unit notification state (such that the third specific effect is performed based on the result of lottery processing for the number of ending games by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing to execute processing (Fig. 79).

According to the above configuration, the number of games (the number of finished games), which is the difference between the unit notification state and the end game of the unit state, tends to vary depending on the set value, and the set value is predicted from the number of games of the difference. It is possible to realize novel playability.

Feature E12. As the advantageous states, the first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and the second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the continuation condition of the unit state is more likely to be satisfied than the first advantageous state ) and
The fourth means is
In the first advantageous state, when the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the ending unit notification state is set so that the number of finished games is likely to become the first number. When the specific notification is executed in the previous unit notification state and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the number of finished games is set to easily become the second number. Execute the specific notification in the unit notification state before the unit notification state to end,
In the second advantageous state, when the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the ending unit notification state is adjusted so that the ending game number is likely to be the second number. When the specific notification is executed in the previous unit notification state and the setting value set by the setting means is the second setting value, the number of finished games is set to easily become the first number. The gaming machine according to feature E11, wherein the specific notification can be executed in the unit notification state before the unit notification state to end.

According to the above configuration, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state having different continuation conditions, the set value indicated by the number of games (the number of finished games) of the difference between the unit notification state and the end game of the unit state is different. ing. In other words, in order to narrow down the setting value, it is not enough to simply grasp the number of games of the difference, and it is necessary to grasp which advantageous state is before that. Become. By doing so, it is possible to preferably improve the playability in an advantageous state.

Feature E13. The specific notification means is a second means for executing the specific notification regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied (a third specific effect lottery by the display control device 81). and a function to execute processing for performing these specific effects based on the fourth specific effect lottery),
The second means includes execution determination means (display control) for determining execution of the specific notification according to a lottery result of the lottery means in each game in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. a function of executing a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the device 81), and executes the specific notification based on the determination result by the execution determination means,
The feature E12, characterized in that the execution determination means performs the execution determination of the specific notification so that the probability of execution of the specific notification differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. The game machine described.

In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is completed, there are games of a specific number or more in the next unit state, and at any timing the specific notification is executed. A special number of games in the next unit notification state can be played. Therefore, in the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, the specific notification is executed regardless of the number of remaining games, thereby generating randomness in the execution timing of the specific notification. is possible, it becomes difficult to know when the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is updated, and it is possible to diversify the performance.

Moreover, in the unit state where the condition for continuation is satisfied, execution of the specific notification is determined according to the lottery result of each game, so it gives an impression as if the condition for continuation is satisfied by the lottery result of each game. It is possible to give it to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to each game.

In addition, since the execution determination of the specific notification is performed so that the probability of winning is different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to stay in any advantageous state from the occurrence rate of the specific notification. It becomes possible for the player to predict whether there will be. By doing so, in the middle of the advantageous state, the type of the advantageous state is grasped from the occurrence rate of the specific notification in the unit notification state, and when the unit notification state ends, the game number of the difference until the advantageous state ends and the number of games. , the type of the predicted advantageous state, and the set value can be predicted, which makes it possible to realize interesting game characteristics.

The inventions described in the features E1 to E13 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features E1 to E13, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 individually, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. On the other hand, when the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Control means (function for executing processing for performing a pseudo-set effect by the display control device 81);
First means for performing the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is greater than the special number (start of a set in which a continuation command by the display control device 81 has not been received) The ability to perform processing to update the pseudo set in the game) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, a game of a special number is set as one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. Then, the next unit notification state is started, and if a special number of games are executed without specific notification being performed in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished. As a result, the player can understand that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect the specific notification to be performed in the unit notification state.

However, in the configuration in which the continuation of such an advantageous state is notified by repeating the unit notification state, if the advantageous state ends despite the existence of the remaining number of games in the unit notification state, the original premise is It will collapse, and the reliability of the notification by the unit notification state will be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is greater than the special number, the specific notification is performed. In this state, the special number of games can all be played, and the advantageous state can be ended in a situation where there is no remaining number of games in the unit notification state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably expect the production effect by the notification of the unit notification state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature F2. In a situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is greater than the special number, execution determination means for determining the execution of performing the specific notification in the unit notification state (a third specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81, a function of executing a fourth specific effect lottery process), and when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification, the specific notification is performed. The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized by comprising second means (a functional function of executing a process for performing a specific effect based on the lottery result of each specific effect lottery by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches the predetermined number, the specific notification is uniformly generated and the unit notification state is updated. Specific notification occurs based on the execution determination of , and the unit notification state is updated. By doing this, it becomes difficult to know when the specific notification will occur in each game in the unit notification state, and it is possible to suitably realize the game property that makes it possible to grasp the continuation of the advantageous state by repeating the unit notification state. Become.

Feature F3. When a predetermined opportunity (AT set update) occurs in the advantageous state, after executing a predetermined number of games larger than the special number, end determination means (main controller) for determining the end of the advantageous state 101 to execute continuation determination processing),
The first means, when the end determination result by the end determination means is an end result (discontinuation) corresponding to ending the advantageous state after executing the predetermined number of games, the unit notification state The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, characterized in that the specific notification is performed in.

According to the above configuration, the end determination means is configured to perform end determination to end the advantageous state after a predetermined number of games, and when the result of the end determination is the end result, the specific notification is performed and the unit Notification status is updated. With such a configuration, the first means in the specific notification means only has to make a specific notification based on the determination result of the end determination means, and the first means does not need to constantly grasp the number of remaining games in an advantageous state. simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature F4. a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the end determination means;
a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the notification control means and provided separately from the first control device;
The gaming machine according to feature F3, characterized by comprising:

As in the above configuration, if the end determination means and the specific notification means (especially the first means) are provided in separate control devices, the function distribution will more preferably bring about the effect of feature F3. be able to.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or feature F4, wherein the predetermined opportunity occurs each time the predetermined number of games are executed.

According to the above configuration, the end determination means does not perform end determination for each game, but performs end determination for each predetermined number of games. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the frequency of end determination, and to suppress the processing load.

Feature F6. The notification control means provides third means (display A gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for performing a specific effect when the AT set is updated by the control device 81 .

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the end determination is not the end result, the specific notification may be performed by the third means. It is possible to successfully camouflage the game, and the specific notification is less likely to be a sign that the game will end after a predetermined number of games remain. In this way, even if the specific notification is made, it is possible to expect that the advantageous state will continue.

Feature F7. The first means is configured to perform the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number larger than the special number,
Special notification means capable of executing a predetermined special notification over the number of games that is the difference between the predetermined number and the special number (processing for performing ending effects and jackpot effects by the display control device 81) The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F6, characterized in that it has a function to execute.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is performed by the first means, the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number, and among them, the special number of games is the unit notification state after being updated by the specific notification. is performed, and the special notification is performed over the number of games that is the difference between the predetermined number and the special number. By doing so, even if the predetermined number and the special number do not completely match, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a blank period in the performance.

Feature F8. Characteristic feature F7, characterized in that the special notification means executes the special notification after the unit notification state following the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means is completed. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed after the next unit notification state updated by the specific notification, and the advantageous state ends when the special notification ends. In other words, the special notification becomes an effect indicating the end of the advantageous state, and after the end of the effect by the unit notification state, the game is supplemented by a so-called ending effect until the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the performance during the period in which the performance by the unit notification state is not performed without discomfort.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The special notification means executes the special notification indicating that the advantageous state ends after the unit notification state following the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means ends. The gaming machine according to feature F7 characterized by:

Feature F9. The special notification means executes the special notification in a game between the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means and the unit notification state subsequent to the unit notification state. The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed in the game between the unit notification state updated by the specific notification and the next unit notification state, and when the next unit notification state ends, the advantageous state ends. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the advantageous state will end if the specific notification is not performed during the unit notification state, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification. . In this case, the special notification corresponds to a jackpot performance indicating that the specific notification occurs in the unit notification state and the transition to the next unit notification state occurs, and the performance during the period in which the performance in the unit notification state is not performed is uncomfortable. can entertain without

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The special notification means updates the unit notification state in a game between the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means and the unit notification state next to the unit notification state. The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized by executing the special notification indicating that the game will be played.

In addition, the above "special notification" is not limited to the game between the unit notification state terminated by the specific notification by the first means and the next unit notification state, but the unit terminated by the specific notification by other means By configuring the special notification to be performed even in the game between the notification state and the next unit notification state, the special notification is a notification indicating that the unit notification state can be updated. becomes possible.

Feature F10. The first means is configured to perform the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number larger than the special number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the predetermined number is a number that is less than or equal to twice the special number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, the specific notification is performed to end the unit notification state, and then when the unit notification state is started from the next game, the unit notification state is terminated. When the special number of games has been completed, the number of games remaining in an advantageous state is less than the special number. That is, at the time when the unit notification state over the special number of games cannot be digested for two times, but can be digested for at least one, the specific notification by the first means is performed. Therefore, it is sufficient to end the effect by the unit notification state after performing without updating the unit notification state for one time (without generating the specific notification), and the advantageous state ends during the unit notification state. It is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

Feature F11. The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein the predetermined number is one more than the special number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, the unit notification state is started from the next game after the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is terminated. has been consumed for a special number of games, the number of games remaining in an advantageous state becomes 0. By doing so, it is possible to match the end game in the advantageous state with the end game in the effect due to the unit notification state.

In addition, the invention described in the features F1 to F11 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features F1 to F11, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 individually, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to increase more than the first advantageous state and are set,
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. On the other hand, when the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Equipped with a control means (function for executing processing for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81),
When the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by being set to

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, a game of a special number is set as one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. Then, the next unit notification state is started, and if a special number of games are executed without specific notification being performed in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished. As a result, the player can understand that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect the specific notification to be performed in the unit notification state.

As advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different numbers of continuous games are set. It is set so that the average number of executed games as the number of staying games in the unit notification state when the specific notification is performed in the notification state is increased.

In this case, since the number of staying games in the unit notification state is larger in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, even if the number of games in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is the same. If it continues, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. Then, even if the second advantageous state lasts substantially longer than the first advantageous state, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state. It is possible to make it look smaller than the difference. In this way, it is possible to make the difference in the number of games in the advantageous state appear larger by the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, thereby making it possible to improve interest.

Feature G2. The notification control means is an execution determination means for determining execution of the specific notification in each game in the unit notification state (executing the third specific effect lottery process or the fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81 function), and the specific notification is performed when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to executing the specific notification,
By setting the probability that the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means will be the corresponding result is higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, the specific Characteristic G1 characterized in that when the notification is executed, the average number of executed games executed in the unit notification state is larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to expect an excellent effect of the feature G1 simply by changing the winning probability of the execution determination of the specific notification.

Feature G3. The execution determination means is configured to perform the execution determination according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the probability that the result of the execution determination in the first advantageous state is the corresponding result is the result of the execution determination in the second advantageous state with the corresponding result. The gaming machine according to feature G2, which is set to be higher than the probability of becoming.

According to the above configuration, execution determination is performed according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to give the impression that whether or not the specific notification is executed depends on one's own luck. Advantageously, the attention to the results is enhanced.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state have a common probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the specific result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the occurrence rate of the specific notification higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state without differentiating the probability that the lottery result of each game becomes the specific result. Therefore, as a result, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state can be made larger in the second advantageous state, and excellent game performance of feature G1 is realized with a relatively simple configuration. becomes possible.

Feature G5. According to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that an average number of repetitions of the unit notification state is set so as to be larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. game machine.

In the above configuration, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is likely to be smaller in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state is relatively small for the number of continuous games. In the configuration that can be increased, the average number of repetitions of the actual unit notification state is set so that the second advantageous state is larger, and the average number of executed games in the unit notification state The difference will not be enough to reverse the number of iterations. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the impression of a so-called successful race due to an excessively large difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state.

Feature G6. According to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state is set to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. game machine.

In the above configuration, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is likely to be smaller in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state is relatively small for the number of continuous games. In the configuration that can be increased, the average number of repetitions of the actual unit notification state is also set to be larger in the first advantageous state, and the difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is such a difference that the number of iterations is reversed. By doing so, by providing a difference in the average number of the number of executed games in the unit notification state, even in the first advantageous state in which the number of continuous games is small, the presentation effect is maximized to make it appear more advantageous than the second advantageous state. A limit can be expected.

When the above configuration is applied to feature G5, the types of advantageous states are increased, and the combination of the first and second advantageous states in feature G5 and the first and second advantageous states in feature G6 It is preferable that the combination with

Specifically, for example, in descending order of the average number of continuous games, the first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%), the second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 60%), and the third advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) is provided, and the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is most easily reduced in the first advantageous state and most easily increased in the third advantageous state. In addition, the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state is larger than the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state (feature G5), and the unit in the second advantageous state By making the average number of repetitions of the notification state larger than the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state (feature G6), the configuration of feature G5 and the configuration of feature G6 are inconsistent. It is possible to prepare without

Feature G7. The advantageous state is defined as one unit state in which a predetermined number of games (18 games) or more are played. While transitioning to a state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state,
Since the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, the number of games is more likely to increase in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied with the specific number of games as one unit state, the transition to the next unit state is performed, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the transition to the next unit state is not performed. Secondly, in the advantageous state of the set management type, the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, and the number of games is increased. In such a set management type advantageous state, the difference in the degree of advantage due to the difference in the number of sets is, of course, greater than the difference in the number of games played. The impression of advantage/disadvantage with is also greatly different. Therefore, by applying the configuration of feature G1 to the set management type advantageous state such as the above configuration, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is made larger than the difference in the number of repetitions of the actual unit state (set number difference). It is possible to increase or decrease the size, and more suitable effects can be expected.

Feature G8. Game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game, which is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to increase more than the first advantageous state and are set,
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. On the other hand, when the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Equipped with a control means (function for executing processing for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81),
When the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is set to be different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized in that

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, a game of a special number is set as one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. Then, the next unit notification state is started, and if a special number of games are executed without specific notification being performed in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished. As a result, the player can understand that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect the specific notification to be performed in the unit notification state.

As advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different numbers of continuous games are set. It is set so that the average of the number of executed games as the number of staying games in the unit notification state when the specific notification is performed in the state is different.

In this case, for example, if the number of staying games in the unit notification state tends to increase in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, it is assumed that the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are different. When the same number of games are continued, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. Then, even if the second advantageous state lasts substantially longer than the first advantageous state, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state. It is possible to make it look smaller than the difference. Further, for example, if the number of staying games in the unit notification state tends to be smaller in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are the same. When the number of games continues, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be greater in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state appear larger than the difference in the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state.

Thus, according to the above configuration, the difference in the number of games in each advantageous state can be made to appear larger or smaller depending on the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, making it possible to improve interest.

The inventions described in the features G1 to G8 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features G1 to G8, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 individually, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. Game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game, which is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is defined as one unit state in which a predetermined specific number of games (18 games) are played. on the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state,
In the advantageous state, a first notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the first notification (pseudo set effect) over a plurality of games;
In the advantageous state, second notification means (display control device) capable of executing second notification (for example, opening effect, ending effect, or jackpot effect) over a plurality of games so as to be continuous before or after the first notification A function of executing processing for performing opening effects, ending effects, and jackpot effects by 81);
with
When the number of games for which the first notification is performed by the first notification means and the number of games for which the second notification is performed by the second notification means are equal to or greater than the specific number, or less than the specific number A game machine characterized in that it is set so that there is a case.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games played or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is

In such a configuration, the first notification and the second notification are performed during the unit state. There are cases where the number is greater than or equal to the number and cases where the number is less than the specified number. By doing so, even if the number of games in the unit state is not changed from a specific number, it is possible to make it appear as if the number of games in the unit state is increasing or decreasing on the production side, It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state of the set management type without using complicated processing.

Feature H2. The first notification means executes the first notification with the number of games played less than the specific number,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the second notification means executes the second notification when the number of games played is less than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the number of games will not exceed a specific number with only one notification, and it is possible to give the impression that the set of both notifications corresponds to one unit state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably enhance the effect of making the length of the unit state change by both notifications.

Feature H3. The first notification means can execute the first notification over a first number of games, and can execute over a second number of games different from the first number,
The second notification means can execute the second notification over a third number of games, and can execute the second notification over a fourth number of games different from the third number. A gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2.

According to the above configuration, the number of games for both the first notification and the second notification can be changed. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which the second notification is performed following the first notification and one set of effects is performed, even if the first notification is shortened, the second notification is lengthened. It is possible to create a sense of expectation for continuation.

In addition, the above configuration does not exclude that the "first number" and the "third number" are the same number, and the "second number" and the "fourth number" are the same number. It does not exclude that.

Also, the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The first notification means can change the number of games for executing the first notification,
The gaming machine according to feature H1 or feature H2, wherein the second notification means can change the number of games for which the second notification is performed.

Feature H4. The first notification means executes the first notification with the game of the special number (10) as the upper limit,
When a predetermined specific notification is executed during the execution of the first notification by the first notification means, the first notification ends regardless of the number of games remaining in the first notification, and the second notification If the second notification by means is set to start and the specific notification is not executed over the special number of games, the advantageous state ends after the first notification ends. The gaming machine according to feature H3, characterized in that it is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, the first notification is performed over the special number of games, and if the specific notification is performed during the first notification, the second notification is performed, but the specific notification is performed during the second notification. If not, the advantageous state ends. Therefore, the player desires to secure a large number of games for the first notification by performing the specific notification at the earliest possible timing, and the desire to confirm that the advantageous state does not end by performing the specific notification at the earliest possible timing. It is possible to realize thrilling playability by utilizing conflicting desires.

Feature H5. The second notification by the second notification means is terminated in the game in which the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is the number obtained by adding 1 to the special number, and the second notification by the first notification means is terminated from the next game. The gaming machine according to feature H4, characterized by comprising means for starting 1 notification (function for executing processing for ending the jackpot effect in the eighth game of the final AT set by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the gaming machine having the feature H4, in which the advantageous state ends when the first notification is executed without the specific notification being performed over the special number of games.

Feature H6. In the game before the unit state in which the continuation condition is not established, when the second notification is executed by the second notification means, the number of remaining games in the unit state is 1 in the special number. Until the number of games added, means for continuing the second notification that has been executed (function of executing the processing of steps S3905 to S3908 by the display control device 81) characterized by comprising The gaming machine according to H4 or feature H5.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is not satisfied and if the continuation condition is not satisfied as it is, the last unit state is reached, if the second notification is performed in the game before the unit state is updated, The second notification is continued until the number of remaining games in the unit state reaches the special number+1. By doing so, the second notification is made in the last unit state, and then the first notification is made over the special number of games, ending the advantageous state. Such a configuration can be realized because it is a configuration that can change the number of games of the second notification. The end of the unit state and the end of both notifications can be matched well while making it possible to give the impression that it is

Feature H7. In the game before the unit state in which the continuation condition is not established, when the second notification is executed by the second notification means, the number of remaining games in the unit state is 1 in the special number. If the number of continuous games of the second notification when the second notification that has been executed is continued is greater than the upper limit of the number of continuous games of the second notification, the Characteristic H4 characterized by comprising means for ending the second notification and starting the first notification by the first notification means (function for executing the processing of steps S3909 to S3917 by the display control device 81). The game machine according to any one of H6.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is not satisfied and if the continuation condition is not satisfied as it is, the last unit state will be reached, and if the second notification is performed in the game before the unit state is updated. If the second notification is continued until the number of remaining games in the unit state reaches the special number + 1, the upper limit number of games for the second notification is reached, the second notification is terminated and the first notification is performed. make it possible to By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fact that the last unit state is reached from being realized through the fact that the length of the second notification is longer than usual.

Feature H8. The first notification by the first notification means and the The gaming machine according to feature H7, characterized by comprising means for performing the second notification (function for executing steps S3617 to S3620, steps S3715 to S3718, etc. by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the second notification is terminated and the first notification is started when the last unit state is updated, the first notification is performed before the number of remaining games in the last unit state reaches the special number +1. and the second notification are performed. Then, the first notification is made again in the remaining special number of games, and the advantageous state ends. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the unit state is lengthened or shortened by both notifications as in feature H1, and at the same time, the end of the unit state and the end of both notifications can be matched well. becomes possible.

Feature H9. The first notification means can execute the first notification over a first number of games, and can execute over a second number of games different from the first number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the second notification means executes the second notification over a third number of games.

According to the above configuration, the number of games for the first notification can change, while the number of games for the second notification does not change. By doing so, the effect of the feature H1 can be expected only by adjusting the number of games on the first notification side, and the configuration can be simplified.

In addition, the above configuration does not exclude that the "first number" and the "third number" are the same number, and the "second number" and the "third number" are the same number. It does not exclude that.

When the above configuration is applied to the features H3 to H8, for example, "the second notification means includes a specific second notification means and a predetermined second notification means, and the specific second notification means The second notification can be executed over a third number of games and can be executed over a second number of games different from the fourth number, and the predetermined second notification means can perform the second notification. Execute over the third number of games".

Also, the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The first notification means can change the number of games for executing the first notification,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein said second notification means cannot change the number of games for which said second notification is performed.

The inventions described in the features H1 to H9 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features H1 to H9, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 individually, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game, which is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to increase more than the first advantageous state and are set,
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set). While moving to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. On the other hand, when the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Equipped with a control means (function for executing processing for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81),
The number of times (the number of pseudo sets) of the unit notification states executed in the unit state is set so that the second advantageous state tends to be smaller than the first advantageous state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state for a player, a unit state is defined as a specific number of games or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is said that

In such a configuration, the special number of games is set as one unit notification state during the advantageous state, and when the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started. In addition, when the special number of games are executed without performing the specific notification in the unit notification state, after the unit notification state ends, the next unit notification state is not started. can grasp that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect that the specific notification will be performed in the unit notification state.

As advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different numbers of continuous games are set. is set so that the number of times of the unit notification state executed in . is likely to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

In this case, if the unit state is repeatedly executed the same number of times in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. . Then, even if the second advantageous state lasts substantially longer than the first advantageous state and the number of repetitions of the unit state increases, the difference between the number of repetitions of the unit notification state and the second advantageous state is the difference. It is possible to make the difference between the number of continuous games and the first advantageous state appear smaller.

By doing so, it is possible to make the difference in the number of games in each advantageous state appear larger by the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, thereby making it possible to improve interest.

Feature I2. The notification control means is an execution determination means for determining execution of the specific notification in each game in the unit notification state (executing the third specific effect lottery process or the fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81 function), and the specific notification is performed when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to executing the specific notification,
By setting the probability that the result of the execution determination by the execution determining means will be the corresponding result is higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, execution is performed in the unit state. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the number of times of the unit notification state (the number of pseudo sets) is likely to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to expect an excellent effect of the feature I1 simply by changing the winning probability of the execution determination of the specific notification.

Feature I3. The execution determination means is configured to perform the execution determination according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the probability that the result of the execution determination in the first advantageous state is the corresponding result is the result of the execution determination in the second advantageous state with the corresponding result. The gaming machine according to feature I2, which is set to be higher than the probability of becoming.

According to the above configuration, execution determination is performed according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to give the impression that whether or not the specific notification is executed depends on one's own luck. Advantageously, the attention to the results is enhanced.

Feature I4. The gaming machine according to feature I3, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state have a common probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the specific result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the occurrence rate of the specific notification higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state without differentiating the probability that the lottery result of each game becomes the specific result. Therefore, as a result, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the unit state can be increased in the first advantageous state, and the excellent playability of feature I1 can be realized with a relatively simple configuration. becomes possible.

Feature I5. Any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the total number of times of the unit notification state in the advantageous state is set so that the second advantageous state is larger than the first advantageous state The game machine described.

In the above configuration, the number of unit notification states in one unit state, which is based on the specific number of games in the advantageous state, tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the unit notification in the first advantageous state In a configuration in which the number of states can be increased relative to the number of continuous games, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the entire actual advantageous state is set to be greater in the second advantageous state. Therefore, the difference in the number of unit notification states in the unit state is not so large as to reverse the total number of unit notification states in the advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the impression that the difference in the number of times of the unit notification state is too large and that it is a so-called successful race.

Feature I6. Any one of the characteristics I1 to I5, wherein the total number of times of the unit notification state in the advantageous state is set so that the second advantageous state is smaller than the first advantageous state The game machine described.

In the above configuration, the number of unit notification states in one unit state, which is based on the specific number of games in the advantageous state, tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the unit notification in the first advantageous state In a configuration in which the number of states can be increased relative to the number of continuous games, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the entire actual advantageous state is also set to be greater in the first advantageous state. The difference in the number of unit notification states in the unit state is such a difference that the total number of unit notification states in the advantageous state is reversed. By doing so, even in the first advantageous state with a small number of continuous games, it is possible to maximize the production effect that makes it look more advantageous than the second advantageous state.

When the above configuration is applied to feature I5, the types of advantageous states are increased, and the combination of the first and second advantageous states in feature I5 and the combination of the first and second advantageous states in feature I6 It is preferable that the combination with

Specifically, for example, in descending order of the average number of continuous games, the first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%), the second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 60%), and the third advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) is provided, and the number of unit notification states in a unit state is made most likely to be the first advantageous state and the least likely to be the third advantageous state. In addition, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state is larger than the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state (feature I5), and the unit in the second advantageous state By making the total number of repetitions of the notification state larger than the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state (feature I6), the configuration of feature I5 and the configuration of feature I6 are inconsistent. It is possible to prepare without

The inventions described in the features I1 to I6 are known as "a type of gaming machine, such as a pachinko machine and a slot machine. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features I1 to I6, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 individually, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) for progressing the game as one game, which is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to increase more than the first advantageous state and are set,
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set). While moving to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when the continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied, the transition to the next unit notification state is performed. , If the continuation condition is not satisfied, a notification control means (function for executing processing for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) that does not move to the next unit notification state is provided,
The game machine is characterized in that the notification control means is capable of executing the unit notification state across the unit states.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state for a player, a unit state is defined as a specific number of games or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is said that

In such a configuration, a set management type notification is also performed in which a special number of games is set as one unit notification state during the advantageous state, and the unit state is straddled between the unit states in the advantageous state. It allows the notification state to be executed. By doing so, it is allowed that the repetition of the unit state and the repetition of the unit notification state are not synchronized. It is possible to set relatively freely. Therefore, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of repetitions of the unit notification state relative to the actual number of repetitions of the unit state, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the specific number is a number different from an integral multiple of the special number, and the special number is a number different from an integral multiple of the specific number.

As in the above configuration, the number of games, which is the repeating unit of the unit state, and the number of games, which is the repeating unit of the unit notification state, are not in the relationship of an integral multiple, so that the unit state and the unit notification state are different. Hard to sync. Therefore, it becomes easier to execute the unit notification state across the unit states, and the effect of the characteristic J1 can be exhibited more clearly.

Feature J3. The notification control means terminates the unit notification state and starts the next unit notification state when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state as a continuation condition for the unit notification state is established. On the other hand, if the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the condition for continuing the unit notification state is not met, and after the unit notification state ends, the next unit notification state is started. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, characterized in that it has a configuration that does not.

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state may be updated by the specific notification without executing the special number of games, and the number of games in the unit notification state may change with the special number as the maximum number. become. By doing so, in executing the unit notification state across the unit states, if there are cases where the update of the unit state and the update of the unit notification state are synchronized, the unit state and the unit notification state It is possible to relatively freely manage the fact that there is a case where the timing is not synchronized with the specific notification in the unit notification state depending on whether or not the specific notification is executed, and the effect of the feature J1 can be achieved with a simple configuration.

Feature J4. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit state, first execution determination means (third specific Equipped with a function to execute the production lottery process, etc.)
The game according to feature J3, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification when the result of execution determination by the first execution determination means corresponds to execution of the specific notification. machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the unit notification state is updated by the specific notification, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, execution determination of the specific notification is performed regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state. By doing so, the degree of freedom of the game in which the specific notification is executed is greatly improved, and the scene where the unit notification state is executed across the unit states increases. Therefore, it becomes possible to exhibit the effect of the characteristic J1 more suitably.

Feature J5. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the second execution determination means (sub-side continuation by the display control device 81) that determines execution of the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state Equipped with a function to execute the third specific effect etc. in the first game of the AT set where the flag is not set),
According to feature J3 or feature J4, the notification control means executes the specific notification when the result of the execution determination by the second execution determination means corresponds to executing the specific notification. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, in a unit state in which the condition for continuation is not satisfied in a configuration in which the unit notification state is updated by the specific notification, execution of the specific notification is determined according to the number of remaining games in the unit state. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the event that the unit notification state continues despite the end of the unit state and the termination of the advantageous state, and the reliability of the unit notification state. can be guaranteed.

Feature J6. The game according to feature J5, wherein the second execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the specific notification is performed in a game in which the number of remaining games in the unit state is equal to or greater than the special number. machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more preferably exhibit the effect of the feature J5.

Feature J7. When the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied, the notification control means terminates the unit notification state so that the special notification is executed over a predetermined second special number of games. , The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, characterized in that after execution of the special notification, the next unit notification state is started.

According to the above configuration, the game in which the special notification is performed is interposed between the unit notification state and the unit notification state. As the special notification, for example, a jackpot performance may be conceived that congratulates the satisfaction of the continuation condition of the unit notification state. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied. Even if the special number is the same number or the update of the unit state and the unit notification state happen to be synchronized, the game with the special notification causes a gap in the update, and the unit state and the unit state are straddled. As described above, a scene in which the unit notification state is executed is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably exhibit the effect of the feature J1 while enhancing the effect of the performance when the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied.

Feature J8. The gaming machine according to feature J7, wherein the special notification can be executed across the unit state and the unit state.

According to the above configuration, there is a case where the special notification as the jackpot effect is also executed across the unit states. By doing so, it is possible to update the unit notification state regardless of the game in which the unit state is updated, and it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom in performing the effect by the unit notification state. .

Feature J9. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, wherein the special number is smaller than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is likely to be greater than the number of repetitions of the unit state, and by utilizing the fact that the unit notification state is frequently updated, the actual number of continuous games in the advantageous state It is possible to give the impression that the advantageous state continues for a longer time. In addition, by doing so, one unit notification state does not straddle a plurality of unit states when the unit notification state straddles the unit states. Therefore, the update of the unit notification state is performed during at least one unit state, and even though the advantageous state ends without the continuation condition of the unit state being satisfied, the unit notification state is still a special number. It is possible to make it difficult for an event such as not finishing the game to occur.

Feature J10. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9, characterized in that, in one of the advantageous states, the continuation condition of the unit notification state is more likely to be satisfied than the continuation condition of the unit state.

According to the above configuration, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is greater than the number of repetitions of the unit state. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the game continues longer than the actual number of games in which the advantageous state continues.

The inventions described in the features J1 to J10 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

For each configuration of the features J1 to J10, features A1 to A18, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D11, features E1 to E13, features F1 to F11, features G1 to G8, features It is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, and features J1 to J10 individually, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. It is also possible to apply them in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group H to each configuration of feature group A to feature group H detailed above, and It is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operation means is enabled by inserting a game ball through the above.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 10: slot machine as game machine 32: reel as revolving body 41: start lever as start operation means 42 to 44: stop switch as stop operation means 64: speaker constituting auxiliary effect section 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (7)

a game progress means for progressing a game as one game, which is started based on a predetermined start operation by a player and ended based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
privilege granting means for awarding a privilege to a player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set,
As the advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the number of games tends to increase more than the first advantageous state are set,
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games or more can be executed as a unit state, and when the continuation condition for the unit state is satisfied, the unit state is executed and then the next unit state is entered. , when the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
In the advantageous state, the special number of games is set as one unit notification state, and if the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied, the transition to the next unit notification state is performed, while the continuation condition is satisfied. If not, it has a notification control means that does not move to the next unit notification state,
The game machine is characterized in that the notification control means is capable of executing the unit notification state across the unit states. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific number is a number different from the integral multiples of the special number, and the special number is a number different from the integral multiples of the specific number. . The notification control means terminates the unit notification state and starts the next unit notification state when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state as a continuation condition for the unit notification state is established. On the other hand, if the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the condition for continuing the unit notification state is not met, and after the unit notification state ends, the next unit notification state is started. 3. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine is configured so as not to play. In the unit state where the continuation condition is satisfied, regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state, a first execution determination means for determining whether to execute the specific notification;
4. The method according to claim 3, wherein said notification control means executes said specific notification when the result of execution determination by said first execution determination means corresponds to execution of said specific notification. game machine. a second execution determination means for determining execution of the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied;
3 or 4, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification when the result of the execution determination by the second execution determination means corresponds to execution of the specific notification. 4. The gaming machine according to 4. When the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied, the notification control means terminates the unit notification state so that the special notification is executed over a predetermined second special number of games. 6. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the next unit notification state is started after execution of the special notification. 7. The game machine according to claim 6, wherein the special notification can be executed across the unit state and the unit state.

Images